YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2006 All rights reserved.
RX-V1700
Printed in Malaysia WH63550
RX-V1700
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
RX-V1700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, May 8, 2006 3:54 PM
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
i
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may
cause the product and cart combination to
overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page i Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ii
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
iii
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main
room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power
plug from the AC wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
1 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................... 8
Preparing the remote control ..................................... 9
Front panel display .................................................. 10
Rear panel ................................................................ 12
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13
Placing speakers....................................................... 13
Connecting speakers ................................................ 14
Using bi-amplification connections......................... 17
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 18
Information on HDMI.............................................. 19
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 20
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 21
Connecting other components ................................. 22
Connecting a multi-format player
or an external decoder ......................................... 26
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 27
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 27
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 28
Connecting the power cable..................................... 29
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 30
Turning on and off the power .................................. 31
AUTO SETUP....................................................... 32
Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 32
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 38
Basic procedure ....................................................... 38
Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 40
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 41
Using your headphones............................................ 41
Muting the audio output........................................... 41
Displaying the input source information ................. 42
Playing video sources
in the background of an audio source.................. 43
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 43
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS............................. 44
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 44
Sound field program descriptions ............................ 45
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 49
USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 50
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 50
Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 50
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 51
Enjoying multi-channel sources
in 2-channel stereo............................................... 51
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode .................................................... 52
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 53
FM/AM TUNING..................................................54
FM/AM controls and functions ............................... 54
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 55
Manual tuning .......................................................... 56
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 57
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 58
Selecting preset stations........................................... 59
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 60
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ...................61
Connecting the XM Passport System ...................... 61
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 62
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 63
Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 65
Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 70
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 71
USING iPod ...........................................................73
Controlling iPod ...................................................... 73
RECORDING ........................................................75
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS.....76
Changing sound field parameter settings................. 76
Selecting decoders ................................................... 80
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT
(MANUAL SETUP) ..........................................84
Using SET MENU ................................................... 86
1 BASIC MENU...................................................... 87
2 SOUND MENU.................................................... 91
3 INPUT MENU...................................................... 94
4 OPTION MENU................................................... 97
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................101
Controlling this unit, a TV,
or other components .......................................... 101
Setting remote control codes ................................. 103
Programming codes from other remote controls ... 105
Changing source names in the display window..... 106
Macro programming features ................................ 107
Clearing configurations ......................................... 110
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ...113
Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 113
Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 114
ADVANCED SETUP ..........................................117
Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................. 117
Setting remote control ID ...................................... 119
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................122
RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................130
GLOSSARY.........................................................131
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
INFORMATION .............................................134
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER
INFORMATION .............................................135
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................136
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX (at the end of this manual)
• SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD
PROGRAM
• LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
FEATURES
2 En
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 130 W + 130 W
Center: 130 W
Surround: 130 W + 130 W
Surround back: 130 W + 130 W
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx
decoder
◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
XM Satellite Radio
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Passport
System” sold separately)
◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound
content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels,
resulting in a full surround sound experience
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or
high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal
transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on
HDMI version 1.2a
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion
(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI
digital video) capability for monitor out
iPod controlling capability
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod
(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
Other features
◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-
channel input
◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i
(NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3
COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality stereo
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and
macro capability
◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS
◆ Sleep timer
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital
Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM
Satellite Radio Inc.
Neural Surround
™
name and related logos are trademarks owned
by Neural Audio Corporation.
FEATURES
iPod
®
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
GETTING STARTED
3 En
INTRODUCTION
Check that you received all of the following parts.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the
button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in
parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements,
etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
DISC SKIP
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAN
D
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
Remote control
Batteries (6)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
AM loop antenna
Optimizer microphoneSpeaker terminal wrench Power cable
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia, General,
and Korea models)
Indoor FM antenna
(Europe, U.K. and Australia models)
TUNER
CD
CD-R
DTV
PHONO
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DVR/VCR 2
POWER
XM
STANDBY
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET
VOLUME
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ID2
ID1
NUMBER
CAT.
ALL
PRESET
DISPLAY
MUTE
1
2
3
4
5
ENT
6
7
8
9
0
Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control
(except Europe model)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
4 En
This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about
other control and functions.
• AM/FM tuning ........................... see page 54
• XM satellite radio tuning ........... see page 62
1 MASTER ON/OFF
Turns this unit on or off (see page 31).
2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 31).
• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
3 INPUT selector
Selects the desired input source (see page 38).
4 AUDIO SELECT
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and
“ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or
more input jacks (see page 40).
5 TONE CONTROL
Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left, front right
and center channels in conjunction with the PROGRAM
selector (see page 50).
6 STRAIGHT
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 49).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLU ME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
T
UNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
32 BA09
GFEDC
876541
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5 En
INTRODUCTION
7 MULTI ZONE buttons
ZONE 2 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode.
See page 114 for details.
ZONE 3 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode.
See page 114 for details.
These buttons are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF
is pressed inward to the ON position.
ZONE CONTROLS
Switches the zone you want to control between the
main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. See page 114 for
details.
y
After you press ZONE CONTROLS, the indicator for the
currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display for
approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing,
perform the desired operation.
8 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this unit
(see page 10).
9 ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
(see page 52).
0 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control (see page 9).
A NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 53).
B PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the Pure Direct mode (see page 50).
C PROGRAM selector
• Selects sound field programs (see page 44).
• Adjusts the bass/treble balance in conjunction with
TONE CONTROL (see page 50).
D OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied
optimizer microphone in the “AUTO SETUP” procedure
(see page 32).
E PHONES jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones (see page 41).
F VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console or a video camera
(see page 27).
y
To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
G VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
y
This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
■ Opening and closing the front panel
door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel
door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of
the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these
controls.
Note
Note
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6 En
■ Remote control controls and functions
This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about
other control and functions.
• AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 54
• XM satellite radio tuning ........................ see page 62
• Controlling a TV ................................... see page 101
• Controlling other components ............... see page 102
• Controlling option components ............. see page 103
The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded
area below depends on the operation mode selector position. Set
the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate (see page 9).
2 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source you want to control.
y
The selected input source name appears in the display window on
the remote control showing which source is currently operational.
4 Display window
Shows the name of the selected input source that you can
control.
5 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
output level (see page 51).
6 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER
Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or
the “SET MENU” parameters.
7 RETURN
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the
“SET MENU” parameters.
8 Sound field program selector buttons
Select sound field programs (see page 44).
9 SUR. DECODE
Activates decoders to play back 2-channel sources in
surround (see page 80).
Remote control
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
DISC SKIP
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
B
AND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
U
t
S
R
(U.S.A. model)
Note
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7 En
INTRODUCTION
0 MACRO ON/OFF
Turns on or off the macro function (see page 107).
A MACRO
Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a
single button (see page 107).
B STANDBY
Sets the main zone to the standby mode (see page 31).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
C POWER
Turns on the main zone (see page 31).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
D AUDIO SEL
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and
“ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or
more input jacks (see page 40).
E SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 43).
F MULTI CH IN
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external
decoder, etc. (see page 41).
G SELECT k / n
Selects another input source that you can control
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons.
H Operation mode selector
Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons
in the shaded area.
AMP
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (see page 102).
TV
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or
PHONO (see page 101).
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 103.
• When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and
PHONO (see page 103), priority is given to the one set for
DTV/CBL.
I VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
J MUTE
Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level (see page 41).
K PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the pure direct mode (see page 50).
L SET MENU
Enters “SET MENU” (see page 86).
M PAR AMET ER
Displays sound field parameter settings in the on-screen
display (OSD) (see page 76).
N STRAIGHT
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 49).
O EXTD SUR.
Switches between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback of
multi-channel sources (see page 80).
P SELECT
Selects decoders for 2-channel sources (see pages 80 and
82).
Q ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
(see page 52).
R NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 53).
S RENAME
Changes the name of the input source in the display
window (see page 106).
T CLEAR
Clears remote control functions acquired from the learn,
macro and/or rename features (see page 110).
U LEARN
Programs remote control codes of functions from other
remote controls (see page 105).
Note
Note
Notes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 En
This section describes the function of each control on the
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control the amplifier
functions of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
See the following pages for details about other controls
and functions.
• AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 54
• XM Satellite Radio tuning ...................... see page 62
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control is supplied with U.S.A., Canada,
Australia, U.K., China, Asia and General models only.
1 Input selector buttons
Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
2 ID1/ID2 switch
Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2
(see page 104).
3 POWER
Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3.
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
4 STANDBY
Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode.
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
5 VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
6 MUTE
Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to
restore the audio output to the previous volume level.
7 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch
Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that
of Zone 3.
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control
Note
TUNER
CD
CD-R
DTV
PHONO
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DVR/VCR 2
POWER
XM
STANDBY
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET
VOLUME
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ID2
ID1
NUMBER
CAT.
ALL
PRESET
DISPLAY
MUTE
1
2
3
4
5
ENT
6
7
8
9
0
2
7
6
5
4
3
1
(U.S.A. model)
Note
Note
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9 En
INTRODUCTION
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2 Insert the four supplied batteries
(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control (Except Europe model)
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings
(+ and –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes
dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code
and program any acquired functions that may have been
cleared.
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Preparing the remote control
1
3
2
1
3
2
Notes
Notes
30 30
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
Remote control sensor
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10 En
The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when
“XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 65.
1 HDMI indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is
input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 19).
2 DOCK indicator
Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit
(see page 27).
3 Battery charge indicator
Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the
stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit. (see
page 73).
4 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
5 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
6 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 41).
7 Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
8 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
9 Input channel and speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Light up according to the number of presence and
surround back speakers set for “PRESENCE SP” (see
page 89) and “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) in “SOUND
MENU” when “TEST” in “SOUND MENU” is set to
“ON” (see page 92).
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back
speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see
page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for “PRESENCE SP”
(see page 89) and “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) in “SOUND
MENU”.
Front panel display
Note
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER
XM
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
MUTE
VOLUME
dB
LFE
LL C R
SL SB SR
HiFi DSP
DIGITAL
EX
PL x
DSD
neural
PCM
VIRTUAL
YPAO
ENHANCER
MATRIX
DISCRETE
CINEMA
SILENT
24
96
96/24
TUNED
STEREO
AUTO
MEMORY
PS
ZONE2
ZONE3
SLEEP
PTY HOLD
PTY
RT
CT
EON
NIGHT
DOCK
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
DSD
neural
PCM
TUNED
STEREO
AUTO
MEMORY
PS
ZONE2
ZONE3
SLEEP
PTY HOLD
PTY
RT
CT
EON
NIGHT
HiFi DSP
DIGITAL
EX
PL x
VIRTUAL
YPAO
ENHANCER
MATRIX
DISCRETE
CINEMA
SILENT
24
96
K
J
I
H
G
F
D
C
B
A
0
P
O
N
M
L
9
87
654321
E
0........ U.S.A. and Canada models only
P........ U.K. and Europe models only
Presence speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
Surround back speaker indicators
L CR
SL SB SR
LFE
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
11 En
INTRODUCTION
0 neural indicator
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Lights up when the Neural Surround decoder is activated
(see page 81).
A DSP indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP
sound field programs are selected.
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound
field program (see page 45).
HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 45).
B VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 49).
C YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the
speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without
any modifications (see page 32).
D DSD indicator
Lights up when this unit is producing DSD (Direct Stream
Digital) digital audio signals.
E ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (see page 52).
F PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
G Dolby decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the Dolby
decoders of this unit function.
H Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
I Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 41).
J SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 49).
K DTS decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the DTS
decoders of this unit function.
L Tuner indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite
Radio tuning mode.
TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station
(see page 54).
STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal
for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator
is lit (see page 54).
AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning
mode (see page 54).
MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show that a station can be stored
(see page 57).
M ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators
Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on
(see page 114).
N NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode
(see page 53).
O SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 43).
P Radio Data System indicators
(U.K. and Europe models only)
PS, PTY, RT and CT
Light up according to the selected Radio Data System
display mode.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Surround left
DSP sound field
Surround right
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
12 En
1 REMOTE jacks
See page 113 for details.
2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
See pages 21 and 22 for connection information.
3 Audio component jacks
See page 24 for connection information.
4 Video component jacks
See pages 21 and 22 for connection information.
5 ANTENNA terminals
See page 28 for connection information.
6 WRENCH HOLDER
Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when
not in use (see page 15).
7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
See page 29 for details.
8 AC IN/OUTLET(S)
See page 29 for connection information.
9 HDMI connectors
See page 19 for connection information.
0 DOCK terminal
See page 27 for connection information.
A XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
See page 61 for connection information.
B DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks
See page 22 for connection information.
C CONTROL OUT jack
This is a control expansion terminal for custom
installation.
D RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.
Consult your dealer for details.
E Speaker terminals
See page 14 for connection information.
F MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 26 for connection information.
G PRE OUT jacks
See page 25 for connection information.
H ZONE OUT jacks
See page 113 for connection information.
Rear panel
MULTI CH INPUT
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
PRESENCE
SUR.BACK/
SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
SB(8CH)
8765432
HGF
EDCBA09
1
AC IN
AC OUTLETS
HOLDER
WRENCH
SPEAKERS
CENTER
BI-AMP
SURROUND BACK/
PRESENCE
SP1
FRONT
SURROUND
SINGLE
SP2
ANTENNA
FM
GND
AM
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
REMOTE
PHONO
GND
CD
IN(PLAY)
OUT(REC)
CD-R
HDMI
AUDIO
DOCK
XM
DIGITAL INPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
PRE OUT
CONTROL OUT
RS-232C
DIGITAL OUTPUT
ZONE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
PRESENCE
SUR.BACK/
SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
CD
D
VD
DVR/
VCR2
COAXIAL
1
2
CD
DVD
DTV
CBL/
SAT
MD/
TAP E
CD-R
OPTICAL
987
65
4
321
SB(8CH)
DTV
TAP E
MD/
(REC)
(PLAY)
IN
OUT
DVD
DVR/ VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
OUT
OUT
ININ
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
MONITOR OUT
YY
P
R
P
R
P
B
P
B
IN
OUT
SAT
CBL/
IN 2
OUT
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A B
C
R
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
L
R
L
L
DVD
IN 1
(U.S.A. model)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CONNECTIONS
13 En
PREPARATION
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we
recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Place the
center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as
close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or
under it.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back left and right speakers
(SBL and SBR)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)
apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width
as that of the front speakers.
Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA
DSP (see page 134). These effects include sounds that
filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the
screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place
these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 to 1 m (1
to 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inward,
and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass
frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high
fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS
sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical,
because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it
is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers.
Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce
wall reflections.
CONNECTIONS
Placing speakers
SW
FR
PR
PL
FL
SBR
SBL
SL
SR
C
60˚
30˚
PL
PR
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
FR
PRPL
C
FL
1.8 m (6 ft)
30 cm (12 in) or more
1.8 m (6 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
14 En
CONNECTIONS
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be
unnatural and lack bass.
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 31).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this
unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the
monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see
page 30). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 118).
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the
plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
• The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89)
are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87).
• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set
to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PRIORITY” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 89).
• You can use the PRESENCE terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 113).
Connecting speakers
Notes
CAUTION
SPEAKERS
CENTER
BI-AMP
SURROUND BACK/
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SINGLE
SP2
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
R
L
R
R
L
L
R
L
SP1
Front speakers
Surround speakers
(U.S.A. model)
Presence speakers
Subwoofer
Right
Left
Left
Center speaker
Surround back speakers
Right
Left
Left
Right
Right
Zone 2 or Zone 3
speakers
(see page 113)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
15 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
FRONT terminals
Connect front left and right speakers to these terminals.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround left and right speakers to these
terminals.
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back left and right speakers to these
terminals.
When you use a surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the
left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE).
PRESENCE terminals
Connect presence left and right speakers to these
terminals.
SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System)
to this jack.
■ Connecting the speaker cable
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the
cable together to prevent short circuits.
2 Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker
terminal wrench.
3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the
supplied speaker terminal wrench.
Note
10 mm (0.4 in)
Speaker terminal wrench
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
16 En
CONNECTIONS
5 Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto the
WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this
unit when not in use.
■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker
terminals
Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see
page 113).
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the
terminal.
3 Close the tab to secure the wire.
■ Connecting the banana plug
(except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea
models)
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables.
1 Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker
terminal wrench.
2 Insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
y
You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals.
Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the
terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Speaker terminal wrench
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
17 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Some of the speakers have speaker wire connections that
allow bi-amplification to enhance the performance of the
speaker system. This unit allows you to make bi-
amplification connection to one speaker system. Check if
your speakers support bi-amplification. As these speakers
are shipped to you, you will note shorting bars or bridges,
one connecting the two red input terminals and the other
connecting the two black input terminals. Remove these
shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to bi-amplify
your speakers.
■ Conventional connection
If you want to connect your speakers as traditional
loudspeakers using the conventional connection method,
connect your speakers using the regular left and right
speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of
terminals.
■ Bi-amplification connection
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT
and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To
activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP”
to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 119).
Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low
pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.
Using bi-amplification connections
FRONT
+ +
R
L
This unit
Shorting bars
or bridges
Shorting bars
or bridges
Front speakers
Right Left
Note
BI-AMP
SURROUND BACK/
FRONT
SINGLE
+
+
+
R
L
+
This unit
Front speakers
Left
Right
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
18 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
y
This unit equips the video connection function. See pages 20 and
97 for details.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y R PB P
PB
Y
P
R
S
V
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
Note
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
19 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
This unit has the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI OUT jacks for digital audio and video signal input/output. Connect
the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD
player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a
projector).
The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of the selected input source are output at the
HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 42).
■ HDMI compatibility with this unit
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of
the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
y
• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16
feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack
↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt
playback or cause noise.
• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the
HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to
establish the connection to the component.
• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video
and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be
output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “V CONV.” to “ON” in
“MANUAL SETUP” (see page 98) to activate this feature.
Information on HDMI
Note
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
HDMI
components
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch,
2.8224 MHz,1 bit
SACD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following
standards:
• HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by
HDMI Licensing, LLC.
• HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed
by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
Notes
Notes
HDMI
HDMI cable plug
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
20 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Audio signal flow
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be
output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO”
is set to “OTHER” (see page 93).
• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the
analog AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
■ Video signal flow
• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT
VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the
input signals is as follows:
1. COMPONENT VIDEO
2. S VIDEO
3. VIDEO
• The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to
480p/576p. Set CMPNT I/P to ON in MANUAL SETUP to
activate this feature (see page 98).
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite
video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 98) and
HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 98) are
available only when “V CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 97).
• Use the “HDMI I/P” parameter in “OPTION MENU” to
deinterlace the analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT
jack (see page 98). When the analog video signals with 1080i or
720p of resolution are up-converted to HDMI and output at the
HDMI OUT jack, the picture quality may worsen.
• The OSD signal is not output at the VCR 1 OUT and
DVR/VCR 2 OUT jacks and is not recorded.
• The color of the letters and images in the OSD may differ
depending on the input signals and your video monitor.
Audio and video signal flow
Notes
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
HDMI
AUDIO
OutputInput
Analog output
Digital output
Notes
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
Through
Output
HDMI interlace/progressive
up-conversion (see page 98)
Component interlace/progressive
up-conversion (see page 98)
Input
Video conversion (see page 97)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
21 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
y
You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the
rear panel of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio
signals (see page 93).
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they
are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
• Set “V CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 97) to display the short message display and parameter displays.
• Set “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 97) to display the parameter displays.
• The SET MENU and parameter displays appear with the gray background depending on the input video signal format and the setting
of the parameters in “DISPLAY SET” (see page 97).
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Notes
CAUTION
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
MONITOR OUT
Y
P
R
P
B
OUT
PRPB
V
S
Y
TV
(or projector)
(U.S.A. model)
Video in
Component video in
S-video in
HDMI in
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
22 En
CONNECTIONS
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
• When “V CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 97), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see
page 21). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to
the VIDEO jacks.
• When “V CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 97), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When
recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”
(see page 94).
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is
given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
• The parameter displays do not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p are input.
• The parameter and short message displays do not appear when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i or 1080p
resolutions are input and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack.
■ Connecting a DVD player
Connecting other components
Notes
CAUTION
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
DIGITAL INPUT
D
VD
COAXIAL
DVD
OPTICAL
5
2
DVD
DVD
Y
P
R
P
B
DVD
IN 1
A
R
L
LR
C
O
V
S
PR PB Y
(U.S.A. model)
DVD player
HDMI out
Coaxial out
Component out
S-video out Video out
Optical out
Audio out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
23 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
*1
When you connect another VCR to this unit, connect it to the VCR 1 terminals (S VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN, AUDIO IN, S VIDEO
OUT, VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks) same as DVR/VCR 2 terminals except the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
■ Connecting set-top boxes
Note
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
DVR/
VCR2
COAXIAL
3
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
OUT
OUT
ININ
R
R
R
L
DVR/VCR 2
O
U
T
IN
R
L
R
L
V
V
S
S
C
*1
(U.S.A. model)
DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
Coaxial out
S-video out
Video out
Audio in
Video in
S-video in
Audio out
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT VIDEO
HDMI
DIGITAL INPUT
DTV
CBL/
SAT
OPTICAL
7
6
DTV
CBL/SAT
DTV
CBL/SAT
Y
P
R
P
B
CBL/
IN 2
B
C
R
L
SAT
LR
O
O
VV
S
PR PB Y
L R
S
PR PB Y
(U.S.A. model)
HDTV decoder
Satellite receiver,
cable TV receiver
HDMI out
Component out
Video out
Audio out
S-video out
S-video out
Video out
Audio out
Optical out
Component out
Optical out
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
24 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting audio components
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O
ASSIGNMENT” (see page 94).
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-
output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component,
the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
Notes
PHONO
GND
CD
IN(PLAY)
OUT(REC)
CD-R
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
CD
COAXIAL
CD
MD/
TA PE
CD-R
OPTICAL
98
4
1
TA PE
MD/
(REC)
(PLAY)
IN
OUT
R
L
R
L
LR LRLRLR
L
R
L
R
C
O
O
O
(U.S.A. model)
CD recorder
Turntable
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
Audio in
Optical inAudio out
Optical
out
Audio
in
Audio
out
Optical in
Ground
Audio out
Coaxial
out
Audio
out
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
25 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting an external amplifier
This unit has more than enough power for any home use.
However, if you want to add more power to the speaker
output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an
external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks.
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not
make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE
OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see
page 50).
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer (see page 51).
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see
page 87) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87).
1 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
2 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
3 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks
Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When
you only connect one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack.
y
• Set the “SB L/R SP” to “LRGx2”, “LRGx1”, “SMLx2” or
“SMLx1” and “PRESENCE SP” to “NONE” (see page 89) to
output the surround back channel signals at SURROUND
BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.
• Set the “PRESENCE SP” to “YES” and “SB L/R SP” to
“NONE” (see page 89) to output the presence channel signals at
SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.
5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
Notes
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND
PRESENCE
SUR.BACK/
SINGLE(SB)
R
L
5
4321
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
26 En
CONNECTIONS
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or
pre-amplifier.
If you set “INPUT CH” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 96), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT”
in MULTI CH SET (see page 96) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 41), this unit automatically
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
For 6-channel input For 8-channel input
*1
The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in
“MULTI CH SET” (see page 96).
Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
Notes
MULTI CH INPUT
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
SURROUND
SB(8CH)
R
L
LR
LR
Subwoofer
out
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Center out
Surround
out
Front out
Note
MULTI CH INPUT
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
SURROUND
SB(8CH)
TAPE
MD/
(C)
()
R
L
R
L
*1
LR
LRLR
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Front out
Subwoofer
out
Center out
Surround back out
Surround out
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
27 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)
where you can station your iPod and control playback of
your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this
unit using its dedicated cable.
Do not connect this unit to the AC power supply
until all connections between components are
complete.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and
other components before making connections.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock
CAUTION
DOCK
YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10,
sold separately)
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Note
CAUTION
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
R
L
OPTICAL
AUDIO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
O
V
S
L
R
Game console or
video camera
(U.S.A. model)
Optical
output
Video
output
S-Video
output
Audio
output
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
28 En
CONNECTIONS
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals. In general, these antennas should provide
sufficient signal strength.
• Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General
models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area
(see page 119).
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna.
2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT
terminal.
3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires
into the AM ANT terminal.
4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the
other lead wire to the GND terminal.
y
Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to
this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception
when you tune into AM stations (see page 54).
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Notes
ANTENNA
FM
GND
AM
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the
antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
AM loop
antenna
(supplied)
(U.S.A. model)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8
ft) vinyl-covered wire
extended outdoors from a
window.
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
29 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting the AC power cable
Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as doing so may result in fire or
electrical shock.
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the AC power
cable into an AC wall outlet.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of
this unit must be set for your local voltage
BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE
SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and
create a potential fire hazard.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or
counterclockwise to the correct position using a
straight slot screwdriver.
Voltages are as follows:
Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model ......110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet
Korea model ............................................................... None
Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For
information on the maximum power or the total power
consumption of the components that can be connected to
these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 136.
Connecting the power cable
CAUTION
AC IN
AC OUTLETS
(U.S.A. model)
To the AC wall outlet
CAUTION
230-
240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
Voltage indication
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
30 En
CONNECTIONS
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER
IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this
unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the
front speakers.
1 Make sure this unit is turned off.
See page 31 for details about turning on or off this
unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel
and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “SPEAKER IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel
repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
Setting the speaker impedance
CAUTION
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
2,432,5
(U.S.A. model)
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
While holding
down
PROGRAM
8
MIN
IMP.SPEAKER
Note
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
6
MIN
IMP.SPEAKER
MASTER
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
31 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.
■ Turning on this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
inward to the ON position to turn on this
unit.
When you turns on this unit by pressing MASTER ON/
OFF, the main zone is turned on.
■ Turning off this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
again to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
• MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER
and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only
when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
• As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this
unit.
■ Turning on the main zone from the
standby mode
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel (or POWER on the remote control) to
turn on the main zone.
■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel (or STANDBY on the remote control)
to set the main zone to the standby mode.
Turning on and off the power
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
AV
TV
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
MASTER ON/OFF
STANDBY
POWER
Notes
MASTER
Front panel
MASTER
Front panel
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
POWER
Front panel
or
Remote control
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
STANDBY
Front panel Remote control
or
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 31 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
AUTO SETUP
32 En
This unit employs the YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
Once you have connected the supplied optimizer
microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel and have placed it in a suitable location in your
listening room, run “AUTO SETUP” in the OSD or in the
front panel display.
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
y
• You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that
appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual
uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure and an
error or warning message appears in the OSD or in the front
panel display, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on pages 128 and 129 for a complete
list of error and warning messages and proper remedies.
• The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold.
• If the volume level and the crossover frequency of your
subwoofer can be adjusted, set the volume level to about half
way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
2 Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be
when you are seated in your listening position. You can use a 6
mm diameter screw to fix the optimizer microphone to a tripod
(etc.).
AUTO SETUP
Using AUTO SETUP
Notes
(U.S.A. model)
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
3-13
4,14
4
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
(U.S.A. model)
Omni-directional
microphone
Optimizer microphone
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 32 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
33 En
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
3 Make sure of the following check points
before starting the AUTO SETUP operations.
• Speakers are connected appropriately.
• Supplied optimizer microphone is connected to this
unit and placed appropriately.
• Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
• The room is sufficiently quiet.
• The video monitor connected to this unit is turned on.
4 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
5 Press ENTER to enter “AUTO SETUP”.
The “AUTO:MENU” display appears in the OSD.
6 Press l / h to select “SETUP”.
Choices: AUTO, RELOAD
• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO
SETUP” settings and override the previous
settings. When you select “RELOAD”, the
previous auto setup result appears in the OSD. See
step 7 on page 34 and carry out the operations.
“RELOAD” is available only when you have previously run
“AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.
7 Press k / n repeatedly to select “WIRING”,
“DISTANCE”, “SIZE”, “EQ”, or “LEVEL”.
This unit performs the following checks:
Speaker wiring WIRING
Checks which speakers are connected and the
polarity of each speaker.
Speaker distance DISTANCE
Checks the distance of each speaker from the
listening position and adjusts the timing of each
channel.
Speaker size SIZE
Checks the frequency response of each speaker and
sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each
channel.
Choices: CHECK, SKIP
• Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust
the item.
• Select “SKIP” to skip the item and perform no
adjustments.
Parametric equalizer level EQ
Adjusts the frequency and the parametric equalizer
level of each channel to reduce coloration across the
channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is
particularly important if you use different brands or
sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room
with unique sonic characteristics. In addition, the
frequency response of each channel is adjusted in
accordance with the sound output from your front
speakers.
Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT, SKIP
• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency
response of all speakers with higher frequencies
being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT
setting sounds a little harsh.
• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response
of all speakers. Recommended if all of your
speakers are of similar quality.
• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response
of each speaker in accordance with the sound of
your front speakers. Recommended if your front
speakers are of much higher quality than your other
speakers.
• Select “SKIP” to skip the selected item and
perform no adjustments.
Note
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNALINFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
TV
SOURCE
AMP
1
AUTO:MENU
.SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
WIRING;;;;;CHECK
DISTANCE;;;CHECK
SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK
EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL
LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK
START
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Select
p
p
p[
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
1
AUTO:MENU
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
.WIRING;;;;;CHECK
DISTANCE;;;CHECK
SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK
EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL
LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK
START
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Select
p
p
p[
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
34 En
AUTO SETUP
Volume level LEVEL
Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.
Choices: CHECK, SKIP
• Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust
this item.
• Select “SKIP” to skip this item and perform no
adjustments.
8 Press n to select “START” and then press
ENTER to start the setup procedure.
This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test
tones are output from each speaker during the auto
setup procedure. Once all items are set, the
“RESULT:EXIT” display appears in the OSD.
• During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit.
• We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in
the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes
for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.
The display changes as follows.
The results displayed under “RESULT” are as
follows.
Number of speakers SP
Displays the number of speakers connected to this
unit in the following order:
Front/Back/Subwoofer
Speaker distance DIST
Displays the speaker distance from the listening
position in the following order:
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
Speaker level LVL
Displays the speaker output level in the following
order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output
level
• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing
procedure, restart from step 4.
• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are
output.
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure,
the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen
appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on
page 36.
• When this unit detects potential problems during the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the
number of warning messages appears in the above of
“RESULT” (see page 37).
• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR
PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK”
procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND
MENU” (see page 89) is automatically set to
“REVERSE”.
Notes
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
1
AUTO:MENU
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
WIRING;;;;;CHECK
DISTANCE;;;CHECK
SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK
EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL
LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK
. START
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
p
p
p[
RESULT:EXIT
. RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
[
2
AUTO:CHECK
INITIALIZING
.PRE CHECK
MAIN CHECK
EQUALIZING
LEVEL
CHECK CH=CENTER
|||||;;;;;;;;
[]: Exit
p
Notes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
35 En
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
9 Press ENTER to display the setup results in
detail.
10 Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between the
setup result displays.
y
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually
adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see
page 84).
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of
your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to
recalibrate your system.
• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may
be longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your subwoofer.
• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the
same band to provide finer adjustments.
RESULT:EXIT
. RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
[
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
RESULT:WIRING
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK
[]/[]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p[
Notes
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
RESULT:WIRING
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK
FRONT L;;14.0ft
CENTER;;;17.0ft
FRONT R;;15.0ft
PRNS L;;;17.0ft
PRNS R;;;17.0ft
RESULT:DISTANCE1
[]/[]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
FRONT L;;;;;;LRG
RESULT:SIZE
CENTER 1:100Hz;;;+2.5dB
2:300Hz;;;-0.5dB
3:1.5kHz;;+0.5dB
4:1.8kHz;;+2.5dB
5:1.8kHz;;-3.5dB
6:2.5kHz;;+2.5dB
7:10kHz;;;+2.5dB
RESULT:EQ
[]/[]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
FRONT L;;;+1.0dB
CENTER;;;;-1.5dB
FRONT R;;;+6.5dB
PRNS L;;;;-9.0dB
PRNS R;;;;+1.0dB
RESULT:LEVEL1
[]/[]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
[]/[]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
[]/[]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p[
p[
p[
p[
p[
Results of the speaker
connection and wiring
Results of the speaker
distance from the
listening position
Results of the frequency
response of each speaker
Results of the parametric
equalizer of each speaker
Results of the speaker
output level
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 35 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
36 En
AUTO SETUP
11 Press ENTER to return to the top
“RESULT:EXIT” display.
12 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”
and “CANCEL” and then press l / h to
select “SET” or “CANCEL”.
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
13 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
14 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
• After you have completed the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, be
sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away
from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
■ If an error screen appears
Press k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT”
and then press ENTER.
The following display is an example where “E-9:USER
CANCEL” appears in the OSD.
Choices: RETRY, EXIT
• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
Notes
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
RESULT:EXIT
. RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
[
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
RESULT:EXIT
RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
. SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
[
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNALINFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
ERROR
E-9:USER CANCEL
. Don't operate
any function.
. RETRY EXIT
[p]/[[]:Select
[ENTER]:Enter
[
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 36 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
37 En
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
■ If “WARNING” appears
When this unit detects potential problems during the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the
“RESULT:EXIT” display. Check the warning messages to
correct your speaker settings.
Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at
“WARNING” and then press ENTER to
display the detailed information about the
warning.
The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates
the number of warning messages.
2 Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between the
warning displays.
y
• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO
SETUP” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on
page 128.
• When the corresponding warning message is not
applicable to a speaker, “–
–” is displayed instead.
3 Press ENTER to return to the top
“RESULT:EXIT” display.
Note
RESULT:EXIT
. WARNING (3)
RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
[SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
WARNING: W-1
< OUT OF PHASE >
Reverse Channel
FL --
CENTER
PL PR
SL SR
SBL SBR
[]/[] : Select
[ENTER] : Enter
p[
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
RESULT:EXIT
WARNING (3)
RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
. SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
[
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 37 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
PLAYBACK
38 En
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to “DTS” before the
playback (see page 96).
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
y
• See page 42 to display the input source information.
• You can display a gray background in the OSD when there
is no video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK”
in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 97).
• You can change the display settings by using “SHORT
MESSAGE” parameter in “DISPLAY SET”. See pages 98
for details.
2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the operation mode selector to AMP
and then press one of the input selector
buttons on the remote control) to select the
desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for
a few seconds.
For details about controlling XM Satellite Radio when
“XM” is selected as the input source, see page 65.
PLAYBACK
CAUTION
Basic procedure
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
452
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
AV
TV
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
2
2
4
5
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
XM
INPUT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Front panel
Remote control
or
CD-R
CD
PHONO
M
ULTI
CH
TUNER
XM
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
INPUT: DVD
Currently selected input
source
Available input sources
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 38 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
39 En
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
• See page 54 for details about tuning instructions.
• See page 65 for details about XM Satellite Radio
tuning instructions.
4 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume to the desired output level.
y
See page 51 to adjust the level of each speaker.
5 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel (or press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote
control repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display and in the OSD. See
page 45 for details about sound field programs.
Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer
mode cannot be selected when the component connected to
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source
(see page 41) and Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” (see page 40).
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
• To display information about the currently selected input
source in the OSD, see page 76 for details.
■ Guide to contents
VOLUME
+
–
VOLUME
or
Remote controlFront panel
PROGRAM
4
3
2
5
1
STEREO
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
Front panel
or
Remote control
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
Currently selected sound field program
Currently selected sound field program category
Note
When you want to...
See
page
Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 50
Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 50
Enjoy the compressed music sources in enhanced
sound
52
Edit parameters of sound field programs 76
Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at
night
53
Use headphones 41
Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 51
Select a decoder to play back sources with 80
Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 43
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 39 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
40 En
PLAYBACK
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (Audio input jack select) to switch the input jack
assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are
assigned to an input source.
y
• We recommend setting Audio input jack select to “AUTO” in
most cases.
• You can adjust the default Audio input jack select of this unit by
using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 99).
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired
input source.
2 Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel (or
AUDIO SEL on the remote control) repeatedly
to select the desired Audio input jack select
setting.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When
HDMI signals are not input, no sound
is output.
COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1) Digital signals input at the
COAXIAL jack.
(2) Digital signals input at the
OPTICAL jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is
output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
This feature is not available when no digital input jack
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In
addition, HDMI is not available as an Audio input jack
select setting when the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks
are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT
MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 94).
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
INPUT
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
CD
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel
Remote control
CD-R
CD
PHONO
M
ULTI
CH
TUNER
XM
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
A.SEL: AUTO
AUDIO SEL
Currently selected
Audio input jack
select setting
Available input sources
or
SELECT
AUDIO
Note
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 40 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
41 En
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 26) as the input
source.
Rotate the input selector on the front panel to
select MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control).
y
Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the
parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 96).
Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI
CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source and Audio input
jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40).
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 49)
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks of this unit is selected as the input source and Audio input
jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40), only the signals
input at FRONT jacks are output from the connected
headphones.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the
audio output.
y
• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio
output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”
parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 93).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Note
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
or
Using your headphones
Notes
Muting the audio output
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
MUTE
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 41 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
42 En
PLAYBACK
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO”
and then press ENTER.
The audio information about the input source appears
in the OSD.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to navigate the cursor
in the OSD and press l / h to toggle
between the audio and video information
displays.
4 Press SET MENU on the remote control again
to exit from “SET MENU”.
■ Audio information
Signal format FORMAT
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital
signal, it automatically switches to analog input.
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals.
Sampling frequency SAMPLING
The number of samples per second taken from a
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling
frequency.
Channel CHANNEL
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround
channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
“---” appears when there is no source channel available.
Bit rate BITRATE
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate.
Dialogue normalization level DIALOG
The dialogue normalization level preset to the current
input Dolby Digital and DTS signal.
Flag FLAG
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically switch
decoders.
■ Video information
HDMI Signal Type HDMI SIGNAL
Type of the HDMI signals input or output at the
HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.
HDMI Resolution HDMI RES.
Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the
HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.
Analog Resolution ANALOG RES.
Resolution of the analog signals input or output at the
video jacks of this unit.
HDMI Error HDMI ERROR
Error message for HDMI sources or connected
HDMI devices. See page 127 for details.
Displaying the input source
information
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNALINFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
TV
SOURCE
AMP
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Navigating the cursor Selecting the audio or
video information
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
Note
Note
Note
Note
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 42 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
43 En
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source and then an
audio source.
y
Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the
desired setting to select the default background video input source
of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 96).
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 29).
1 Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the desired input
source.
2 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
See page 54 for details about tuning instructions.
3 Press SLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching
the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep
timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front
panel display, and the display returns to the selected
sound field program.
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly
until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel
display.
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on
the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby mode.
Playing video sources in the
background of an audio source
Using the sleep timer
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
XM
Audio sources
Video sources
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
XM
SLEEP
SLEEP 120min. SLEEP 90min.
SLEEP 60min.SLEEP 30min.SLEEP OFF
SLEEP
SLEEP 120min.
Flashes
SLEEP
STRAIGHT
Analog
Lights up
SLEEP
SLEEP OFF
Disappears
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 43 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
44 En
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
• When you set the “DECODER MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” to “AUTO”, this unit selects the appropriate digital decoder
according to the input signal.
• The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources.
• The YAMAHA HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from
the front, back, left and right.
• You can change sound field parameters. See page 76 for details.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 41) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40).
• When you play back DSD sources with any sound field program, this unit converts the DSD signals to PCM signals and then applies
the selected program.
• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the
DTS 96/24 decoder.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.
■ Front panel operations
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
■ Remote control operations
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
press one of the sound field program selector
buttons on the remote control repeatedly.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
(U.S.A. model)
PROGRAM selector
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
(U.S.A. model)
AMP
Sound field program
selector buttons
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 44 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
45 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
BASIC
OPERATION
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
■ For music audio sources
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 50), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 49) or
surround decode mode (see page 80).
Sound field program descriptions
CLASSICAL Hall in Munich
This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively
little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
CLASSICAL Hall in Vienna
A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which
produce a very full, rich sound.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
DIALG. LIFT
SB ROOM SIZES. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLYS.INIT. DLY
P.ROOM SIZE
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
P.INIT. DLY
DSP LEVEL
4
MOVIE
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive
cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.
Available sound field parameters (see page 77)
Program description
Remote control
button
Name of the
program
Created sound
fields
(see page 11)
CINEMA DSP
or
HiFi DSP
Category of the
program
3
ENTERTAIN
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
3
ENTERTAIN
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
CLASSICAL
Hall in Amsterdam
This is a large 2200 seat shoe-box type concert hall in Amsterdam. It has a circular stage with seats located behind the stage.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
CLASSICAL
Church in Freiburg
This program creates the acoustic environment of a big church located in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early
reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALG.LIFT
3
ENTERTAIN
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
3
ENTERTAIN
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 45 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
46 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
■ For various sources
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
CLASSICAL Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are
suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALG.LIFT
LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard
A traditional jazz club in New York, located on 7th Avenue. This room has a low ceiling, and the “stage” is located at the corner of the room.
This program creates an intimate “close-to-the music” feel.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
LIVE/CLUB Warehouse Loft
This program simulates a space enclosed by concrete. An energetic sound field is created with relatively clear reflections from the walls.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALG.LIFT
LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the
listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
LIVE/CLUB The Roxy Theatre
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat
is at the center-left of the hall.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALG.LIFT
LIVE/CLUB The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
Note
ENTERTAINMENT Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,
the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an
optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. RO OM S IZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
3
ENTERTAIN
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 46 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
47 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
BASIC
OPERATION
■ For visual sources of music
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 82 for details.
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
ENTERTAINMENT Action Game
This sound field has been optimized for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range
per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining
a clear sense of directions.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. RO O M S IZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game
This sound field has been optimized for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field
design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in
the movie scenes in the game.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. RO O M S IZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
Note
ENTERTAINMENT Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot
live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to
the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. RO O M S IZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
ENTERTAINMENT Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera”
offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of
presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent
beauty of music, The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. RO O M S IZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
Note
3
ENTERTAIN
3
ENTERTAIN
2
LIVE/CLUB
3
ENTERTAIN
HiFi DSP
3
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE Standard
This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel
audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded
by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
DSP LEVEL
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
S. LIVENESS
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
SB LIVENESS
DIALG.LIFT
4
MOVIE
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 47 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
48 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
■ Stereo playback
MOVIE Spectacle
This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making
both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or
DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. RO OM S IZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and
expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround,
Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. RO OM S IZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is
made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. RO OM S IZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear
words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. RO OM S IZ E
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INI. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALG.LIFT
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to
create sound depth using only the presence sound field.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
REV. LEVEL
REV.DELAY
DIALG.LIFT
STEREO 2ch STEREO
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 51 for details.
DIRECT
4
MOVIE
5
STEREO
STEREO 7ch STEREO
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2
channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,
etc.
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
PL LEVEL
PR LEVEL
5
STEREO
HiFi DSP
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 48 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
49 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
When you set “SUR. L/R SP”
to “NONE” (see page 88),
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see
page 45).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 88) in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when the Pure Direct (see page 50) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see
page 51) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT”
mode (see page 49).
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 45). When
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 41).
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see
page 50) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 51) is selected, or
when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 49).
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel (or on the
remote control) to select “STRAIGHT”.
■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode
Press STRAIGHT on the remote control so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
Note
Notes
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources
Format Description
Dolby Digital
Standard processing for Dolby
Digital sources.
DTS
Standard processing for DTS
sources. When the input source is
DTS ES Discrete or DTS ES
Matrix format, the respective
indicator appears in the front
panel display.
DSD
Plays back DSD (Direct Stream
Digital) sources.
PCM
Plays back PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) sources.
MPCM
Plays back multi-channel PCM
(Pulse Code Modulation) sources.
Analog
Plays back analog sources.
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
or
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
or
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 49 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
USING AUDIO FEATURES
50 En
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound
of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is
activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the
least circuitry.
Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel (or on the
remote control) to turn on or off the Pure Direct
mode.
The PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up
while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel
display automatically dims.
• When you play back the multi-channel PCM sources (less than
192 kHz), this unit downmixes the multi-channel signals
according to the “SPEAKER SET” in “BASIC MENU” (see
page 87).
• When the component connected to the HDMI IN jacks is
selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to
“AUTO” or “HDMI”, this unit does not turn off the video
circuitry in the Pure Direct mode.
• When you set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”, “HDMI” or
“COAX/OPT” (see page 40) and play back the Dolby Digital,
DTS or multi channel PCM sources, this unit activates the
corresponding decoder.
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in
the Pure Direct mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the OSD
– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for speaker
level settings)
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this
unit is turned off.
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation
is performed.
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front L/R, center, presence L/R speaker channels and
the subwoofer channel.
1 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select the high-frequency
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency
response (BASS)
2 Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the
high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the
low-frequency response (BASS).
■ Bypassing the tone control circuitry
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
BYPASS and cancel the tone control.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R,
center, presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is
selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input
source.
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Notes
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Front panel
Remote control
or
Adjusting the tonal quality
Notes
CONTROL
TONE
PROGRAM
CONTROL
TONE
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 50 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
51 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
“AUTO SETUP” (see page 32) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 90).
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press LEVEL on the remote control
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
y
• Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can
also select the speaker by pressing k / n.
• Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR.
B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see
page 89).
2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust
the speaker output level.
• Press i to increase the value.
• Press j to decrease the value.
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.
1 Set the operation mode to AMP and then
press STEREO on the remote control
repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.
y
• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS
OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 87).
• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the
PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
2 Press PARAMETER and then l / h to set the
“DIRECT” parameter.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP
processors and the tone control circuitry only when
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see
page 50).
• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP
processors and the tone control circuitry when
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.
y
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are
input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from
the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and
right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the
following cases:
–“LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 87).
–“FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 88) and
“LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 87).
• Press PARAMETER again to exit from the parameter
setting mode.
Adjusting the speaker level
Note
Display Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SB L
Surround back right speaker
SB R
Surround back left speaker
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
PRNS L
Presence left speaker
PRNS R
Presence right speaker
TITLE
BAND
LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
2-channel stereo
5
STEREO
2ch Stereo
TV
SOURCE
AMP
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 51 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
52 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are
created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is
resampled to lower the bit rate and to remove sounds that
are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The
Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances
your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened
complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as
well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass
is compensated, providing improved performance of the
overall sound system.
• When you play back DSD sources or PCM sources whose
sampling frequencies are higher than 48 kHz, this unit samples
them down to 48 kHz or lower and applies the Compressed
Music Enhancer mode.
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with
any of the sound field programs.
Press ENHANCER on the front panel (or set the
operation mode selector to AMP and then press
ENHANCER on the remote control) repeatedly to
select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer
mode.
The following display is shown in the OSD and the
ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display.
Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 7ch Enhancer, Off
• Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 2-channel stereo.
• Select “7ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
• Select “Off” to turn off the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode.
When you select “Off”, this unit returns to the previously
selected sound field program.
■ Changing the parameter of the
Compressed Music Enhancer mode
Press PARAMETER and then l / h on the
remote control to select the desired effect level.
The following display is shown in the OSD.
Choices: HIGH, LOW
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.
y
Press PARAMETER to turn off the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode parameter display.
Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the
characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set
the effect level to “LOW”.
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
Notes
ENT
ENHANCER
MUSICENHANCER
2chEnhancer
ENHANCER
TV
SOURCE
AMP
ENHANCER
Lights up
or
Note
Note
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
MUSIC ENHANCER
2ch Stereo
. LOW [HIGH
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 52 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
53 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on
the type of material you are playing.
1 Press NIGHT on the front panel (or set the
operation mode selector to AMP and then
press NIGHT on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust
the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front
panel display.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following
cases:
–when the Pure Direct mode (see page 50) is selected.
–when the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 41).
–when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness
depending on the input source and surround sound settings
you use.
Selecting the night listening mode
+
10
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
NIGHT
or
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Effect.Lvl:MID
Remote control
Notes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 53 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
FM/AM TUNING
54 En
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset
stations with each other.
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
■ Front panel functions
1 INPUT selector
Selects “TUNER” as the input source.
2 A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) (see
page 57).
3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
• Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)
when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel
display (see page 57).
• Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not
displayed in the front panel display (see page 56).
4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT
• Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH
l
/
h
between selecting preset station numbers and selecting
the tuning frequency.
• Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 58).
5 FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see
page 55).
6 MEMORY
Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this
button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset
tuning (see page 57).
7 TUNING MODE
Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator
is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is
turned off) (see page 55).
■ Remote control functions
1 TUNER
Selects “TUNER” as the input source. This unit is turned
into the last selected station.
2 BAND
Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see
page 55). This unit is turned into the last selected AM or
FM station.
3 PRESET/CH k / n
Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when
the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (on
page 58).
4 Numeric buttons
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations (see
page 59).
5 A-E/CAT. l / h, A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see
page 57).
FM/AM TUNING
Note
FM/AM controls and functions
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TU
N
IN
G
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
75432 6
1
(U.S.A. model)
TUNER
CD
CD-R
DTV
PHONO
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DVR/VCR 2
POWER
XM
STANDBY
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET
VOLUME
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ID2
ID1
NUMBER
CAT.
ALL
PRESET
DISPLAY
MUTE
1
2
3
4
5
ENT
6
7
8
9
0
5
3
1
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
5
3
2
4
1
(U.S.A. model)
Set to
SOURCE
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 54 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
55 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
•Press h to tune into a higher frequency.
•Press l to tune into a lower frequency.
Automatic tuning
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUN
I
N
G
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
4 3231
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
FM AM
or
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
AUTO
AFM88.9MHz
Lights upNo colon (:)
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
TUNING
PRESET/
TUNED
AFM88.9MHz
PRESET/TUNING/CH
Lights up
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 55 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
56 En
FM/AM TUNING
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator disappears from the front panel
display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune
into the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to continue searching.
Manual tuning
Note
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TU
N
ING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
4 3231
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
FM AM
or
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
AFM88.9MHz
No colon (:)
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
TU
NING
PRESET/
PRESET/TUNING/CH
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 56 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
57 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in
order. You can then recall any preset station easily by
selecting the preset station number.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception
band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
• You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations. Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/
TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3
to select the preset station number under which the first
station will be stored.
• You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store
FM stations automatically. Press PRESET/TUNING so
that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display
and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l after pressing
and holding MEMORY for more than 3 seconds.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after
searching for all the available stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station
you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it
manually and store it as described in “Manual preset
tuning” on page 58.
Automatic preset tuning
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNIN
G
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
321
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
FM
Notes
AUTO
MEMORY
A1:FM88.9MHz
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
Flashes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 57 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
58 En
FM/AM TUNING
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See pages 55 and 56 for tuning instructions.
2 Press MEMORY.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
•Press h to select a higher preset station number.
•Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along
with the station frequency.
Manual preset tuning
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNIN
G
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
4 2,53
(U.S.A. model)
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MEMORY
Flashes
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
MEMORY
A :FM88.9MHz
Preset station
group
Flashe
s
Colon (:)
Notes
PRESET/TUNING/CH
MEMORY
A1:FM88.9MHz
Preset station number
Flashes
A1:FM88.9MHz
The displayed station has been stored as A1.
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 58 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
59 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, set the
operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press TUNER to
select “TUNER” as the input source.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or set the
operation mode selector to SOURCE and
then press A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote
control) to select the desired preset station
group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) to select the desired preset
station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
Selecting preset stations
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
21
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
1,2
1
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
Front panel
Remote control
PRESET/TUNING/CH
A1:FM88.9MHz
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
or
Front panel
Remote control
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 59 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
60 En
FM/AM TUNING
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 59.
2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 59.
4 Press EDIT again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
Exchanging preset stations
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNIN
G
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
3 2,43
(U.S.A. model)
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
TU
NING
PRESET/
MEMORY
E1:FM88.9MHz
FlashesFlashes
MEMORY
A5:FM88.9MHz
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING/CH
Flashes
Flashes
EDIT E1-A5
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
TU
NING
PRESET/
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 60 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
61 En
BASIC
OPERATION
XM Satellite Radio is a satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States and Canada,
broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes over 160 digital channels of choice from coast to
coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33
channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the
traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide.
Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM
using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on
page 63. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada).
This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround
sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience.
• The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48
contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii)
and Canada.
• XM Passport System and monthly subscription are sold
separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States)
or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada).
• For information on obtaining the XM Passport System, visit the
XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States)
or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada), or
consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products.
• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,
the XM Passport System must be placed at or near a southerly
facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can
mount it indoors or outdoors.
■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM
Passport and XM Passport Home Dock required to receive
XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other
fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may
apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and
programming subject to change. Channels with frequent
explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel
blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling “1-
800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” (for residents in the
United States) or “1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)”
(for residents in Canada). Subscriptions subject to
Customer Agreement available at “http://
www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or
“http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). XM
service only available in the 48 continuous United States
and Canada. “XM Ready” is a trademark of XM Satellite
Radio Inc. © 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights
reserved.
Connect XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold
separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.
For details, see the operating instructions provided with
XM Passport System.
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
Notes
Connecting the XM Passport System
XM
XM Passport and
XM Passport Home Dock
(sold separately)
(U.S.A. model)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 61 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
62 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or
set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source.
■ Front panel functions
1 INPUT selector
Selects “XM” as the input source.
2 CATEGORY
(All Channel Search mode)
Changes the channel category while staying in the All
Channel Search mode.
(Category Search mode)
Changes the channel category.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel group (A to E).
3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold
for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press
and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).
4 SEARCH MODE
Changes the search mode between the All Channel
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes
(see page 66).
5 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 70).
6 DISPLAY
Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as
channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or
song title displayed in the front panel display or in the
OSD (see page 71).
■ Remote control functions
1 XM
Selects “XM” as the input source.
2 PRESET/CH k / n
(All Channel Search mode)
Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold
for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press
and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).
3 XM MEMORY
Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 70).
4 Numeric buttons
(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)
Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.
(Preset Search mode)
Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.
5 Operation mode selector
Set to SOURCE when you operate the XM Satellite Radio
tuning function.
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions
Note
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
T
UN
IN
G
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
6432 5
1
(U.S.A. model)
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
DISC SKIP
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
7
2
3
4
9
1
8
6
5
TUNER
CD
CD-R
DTV
PHONO
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DVR/VCR 2
POWER
XM
STANDBY
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET
VOLUME
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ID2
ID1
NUMBER
CAT.
ALL
PRESET
DISPLAY
MUTE
1
2
3
4
5
ENT
6
7
8
9
0
4
1
A
C
B
8
9
0
2
7
(U.S.A. model)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 62 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
63 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
6 SRCH MODE
Changes the search mode between the All Channel
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes
(see page 66).
7 A-E/CAT. l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Changes the channel category.
(Category Search mode)
Changes the channel category.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel group (A to E).
8 DISPLAY
Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as
channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or
song title displayed in the front panel display or in the
OSD (see page 71).
9 ENT
Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct
Number Access mode (see page 69).
0 ALL
Selects the All Channel Search mode (see page 66).
A NUMBER
Press and hold before you press the input selector or
numeric buttons to switch the function to entering
numbers.
B PRESET
Selects the Preset Search Mode (see page 68).
C CAT.
Selects the Category Search mode (see page 67).
To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio
service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.
Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and
then visit the website or call toll-free with a major credit
card handy for signing up.
For residents in the United States
URL: http://activate.xmradio.com/
Toll-free: 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)
For residents in Canada
URL: https://activate.xmradio.ca/on-line-activation/
activation.jsp
Toll-free: 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)
Activating XM Satellite Radio
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 63 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
64 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the operation mode selector to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
2 Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level
and adjust the orientation of XM Passport
System for a better percentage of the
reception level.
y
You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by
using the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION
MENU” (see page 100).
• If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel
display, XM Passport System may not be connected to the
XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See
“Connecting the XM Passport System” on page 61 and
check the connection.
• The “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU”
(see page 100) cannot be adjusted by using the remote
control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of XM
Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for
a better percentage of the reception level.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) to select channel “0”.
You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search
mode (see page 66) is not selected.
4 Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number
displayed in the front panel display and write
it down.
ID:_____________________________________
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TU
NING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
31
V
-
AUX/DOCK
AV
TV
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
1
3
1
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
XM
CD-R
CD
PHONO
M
ULTI
CH
TUNER
XM
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
Front panel
Lights up
Remote control
Notes
Note
PRESET/TUNING/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Remote controlFront panel
or
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 64 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
65 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the operation mode selector to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio
information (such as channel number, channel name,
category, artist name, or song title) for the currently
selected channel appears in the front panel display.
y
When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.
The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” on page 66.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” on page 67.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Preset Search mode” on page 68.
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct Number Access
mode” on page 69.
y
• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the
surround sound content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts
in multi-channels (see page 80).
• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see
page 70).
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the
front panel display or in the OSD (see page 71).
Basic XM Satellite Radio
operations
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
AV
TV
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
(U.S.A. model)
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
T
UNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT selector
XM button
Set to
SOURCE
Note
INPUT
XM
CD-R
CD
PHONO
M
ULTI
CH
TUNER
XM
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
[001] Preview
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Lights up
Remote control
or
Front panel
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 65 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
66 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ All Channel Search mode
1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”.
2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to search for a
channel within all channels.
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel
(or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNI
N
G
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
2 3 1
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
2,3
1
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
TUNIN
G
PRESET/
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
ALL CH SEARCH
or
Front panel Remote control
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Front panel Remote control
or
PRESET/TUNING/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Front panel
or
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 66 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
67 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Category Search mode
1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.
2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to search for a
channel within the selected channel
category.
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel
(or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TU
NING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
2 3 1
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
RETURN
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
2,3
1
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
TU
NING
PRESET/
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
CAT SEARCH
or
Front panel Remote control
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Front panel Remote control
or
PRESET/TUNING/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Front panel
or
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 67 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
68 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Preset Search mode
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For
details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset
channels” on page 70.
y
The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is
“[001] Preview”.
1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”.
2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the preset channel
group (A to E).
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to change the
preset channel number (1 to 8).
y
You can also select the preset channel number directly by
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TU
N
ING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
2 3 1
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
RETURN
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
2,3
1
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
TUNIN
G
PRESET/
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
PRESET SEARCH
or
Front panel Remote control
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Front panel Remote control
or
PRESET/TUNING/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Front panel
or
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 68 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
69 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Direct Number Access mode
1 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or
“CAT SEARCH”.
2 Press the numeric buttons on the remote
control to enter the desired three-digit
channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
numeric buttons as shown below.
The display changes as follows.
y
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the
numeric buttons on the remote control and then press ENT
to confirm the input number.
• Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit
confirms the entered channel number.
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter
a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically
confirms the entered channel number.
• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT
cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
2
1
(U.S.A. model)
ALL CH SEARCH
CAT SEARCH
or
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
Remote control
1
CLASSICAL
2
LIVE/CLUB
3
ENTERTAIN
<XM> --1
<XM> -12
<XM>123
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 69 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
70 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”
on page 68.
1 Search for a channel you want to set as a
preset channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on
page 65 for details.
2 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM
MEMORY on the remote control).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while
the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to select a preset channel group
(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The preset channel group letter appears in the front
panel display.
Setting the XM Satellite Radio
preset channels
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TU
NING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
4 2,53
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
3,4
2,5
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
[043] XMU
Currently selected channel number
Note
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MEMORY
RETURN
XM MEMORY
Flashes
or
Front panel Remote control
MEMORY
C [043] XMU
Currently selected preset channel group
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Front panel
Remote control
or
Flashes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 70 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
71 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to select a preset
channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The preset channel number appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM
MEMORY on the remote control) to set the
selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a
preset channel while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number
for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns
off in the front panel display.
Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously
stored in the same preset channel group and number is
cleared.
You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such
as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,
or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front
panel display or in the OSD.
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel
display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and
Canada models only)” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on
page 122 for appropriate remedies.
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information in the front panel display
Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the
remote control repeatedly to toggle between the
following XM Satellite Radio information display
modes.
Note
MEMORY
C5 [043] XMU
Currently selected preset channel number
PRESET/TUNING/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Front panel
or
Flashes
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
RETURN
XM MEMORY
Front panel
Remote control
or
C5: [043] XMU
Colon (:)
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information
Note
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TU
NING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
(U.S.A. model)
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
RETURN
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
Channel number / name
Channel category
Artist name / Song title
or
Front panel
Remote control
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 71 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
72 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
When the channel number / name is displayed:
When the channel category is displayed:
When the artist name / song title is displayed:
y
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM
Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a
continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by
using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see
page 98).
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information
display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the
XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as
described above.
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information in the OSD
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following screen is displayed in the OSD.
y
• To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY on the front panel (or on
the remote control).
• You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “ON
SCREEN” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98).
• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press
ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the
OSD.
• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released
if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you
change the XM Satellite Radio channel.
• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information
screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM
Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote
control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio
information screen is being hold.
Note
[043] XMU
<CAT>Rock
Coldplay / Spe
XM INFORMATION
ALL CH SEARCH
XM :043
CHAN :XMU
CAT :Rock
NAME :Coldplay
TITLE :Speed of sound
.( Coldplay / Spe )
[]/[]:CHANNEL
[p]/[[]:CATEGORY
p
p
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
Remote controlFront panel
or
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 72 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
USING IPOD
73 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected
to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 27), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression
artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 52).
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other
components” on page 102.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 128.
• Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges
the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHRG” parameter in
“OPTION MENU” (on page 100).
• While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 10) appears in the
front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears.
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as
the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done
with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)
or without it (simple remote mode).
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the OSD of this unit.
y
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD
of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in
the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL”
parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98). You can
also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD.
Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to
suit your personal preferences.
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your
iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are
replaced with underscores “_”.
• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in
the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between
the “Settings” parameter settings.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your
iPod to select the desired photos or video clips.
USING iPod
Notes
Controlling iPod
Notes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 73 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
74 En
USING iPod
1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press DISPLAY on the remote
control.
The following display appears in the OSD.
2 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
navigate the iPod menu and then press
ENTER to begin playback of the selected
song.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),
Albums (albums), Songs (songs),
Genres (genres), Composers (composers),
Settings (settings)
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
Shuffle Shuffle
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random
order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in
random order.
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears
in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.
Repeat Repeat
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ”
appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of
songs are being repeated.
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Settings
iPod Top
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
TV
SOURCE
AMP
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Note
Note
1 All
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 74 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
RECORDING
75 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in
noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the
following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs
(when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 50), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 90) and the sound field programs (see
page 45) do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• The XM Satellite Radio signals (U.S.A. and Canada models only) cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the source
component you want to record from.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
RECORDING
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
CAUTION
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
2
V
-
AUX/DOCK
AV
TV
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
2
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
or
Front panel Remote control
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 75 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
76 En
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
You cannot change the sound field parameter values when
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see
page 98). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,
set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press PARAMETER on the remote
control.
The following display is shown in the OSD.
3 Press one of the sound field program
selector buttons repeatedly to select the
desired sound field program you want to
adjust.
4 Press k / n to select the desired sound field
parameter and then l / h to change the
selected sound field parameter value.
•Press h to increase the value.
•Press l to decrease the value.
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound
field parameter, see page 77.
• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the
sound field parameter name in the OSD.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field
program parameter settings.
• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.
In this case, press k / n to scroll through pages.
• If you press and hold l / h to change the sound field
parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown
momentarily in the front panel display.
• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to
initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a
sound field program group (see page 99).
• To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program,
press n repeatedly to select “PARAM. INIT” and then press h
repeatedly.
5 Press PARAMETER to turn off the sound field
parameter display.
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
Changing sound field parameter
settings
Note
(U.S.A. model)
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
4
2
2,5
3
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
MOVIE
.<PROLOGIC>
DSPLEVEL;;;+0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;16ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;16ms
Sci-fi
Sound field program category
Sound field parameters Sound field parameter
values
Cursor
TV
SOURCE
AMP
4
3
2
5
1
STEREO
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 76 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
77 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
y
To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 76 for details.
Sound field parameter Features
DSP LEVEL
DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on
the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level
relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
INIT.DLY
P.INIT.DLY
S.INIT.DLY
SB INI.DLY
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance
from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The
larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set
to a large value.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 77 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
78 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
ROOM SIZE
P.ROOM SIZE
S.ROOM SIZE
SB ROOM SIZE
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
LIVENESS
S.LIVENESS
SB LIVENESS
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the
hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which
has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as
“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets
you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Sound field parameter Features
Level
Level
Level
Time Time Time
Source sound
Early
reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound source
Source sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0 Large value = 10
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 78 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
79 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
REV.TIME
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
REV.DELAY
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
REV.LEVEL
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Sound field parameter Features
Reverberation
Reverberation
Source sound
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Early reflections
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
(dB)
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
REV.TIMEREV.DELAY
Time
60 dB
Source sound
Level
REV. LEVEL
Time
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 79 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
80 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-
channels.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SUR. DECODE on the remote
control to select the surround decode mode.
2 Press SELECT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending
on the type of source you are playing and your
personal preference.
y
• You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT
and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control.
• You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press
PARAMETER and then k / n repeatedly on the remote
control to select the desired decoder parameter. You can
change the value of the selected parameter by pressing
l / h repeatedly on the remote control.
DIALG.LIFT
Dialog lift. Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the
front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher
the position of the front and center channel sound.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
2ch Stereo
DIRECT
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo
sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
y
• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only
when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 50).
• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the
subwoofer in the following cases:
– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 87).
– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 88) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”
(see page 87).
7ch Stereo
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
PL LEVEL
PR LEVEL
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right
levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Sound field parameter Features
Selecting decoders
6
SUR. DECODE
TV
SOURCE
AMP
7
SELECT
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 80 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
81 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Decoder descriptions
y
When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND
DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.
SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
SURROUND DECODE
PLIIx Movie
PL II Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”
is set to “NONE” (see page 89).
SURROUND DECODE
PLIIx Music
PL II Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”
is set to “NONE” (see page 89).
PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH
SURROUND DECODE
PLIIx Game
PL II Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”
is set to “NONE” (see page 89).
CENTER WIDTHDIMENSION
PLIIMusic
PLIIxMusic
SURROUND DECODE
PANORAMA
6
SUR.DECODE
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not
available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89).
Available sound field parameters (see page 77)
Program description
Remote control
button
Name of the
program
Category of the
program
6
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR.DECODE
SURROUND DECODE Neo: 6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources.
6
SUR.DECODE
SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.
C. IMAGE
SURROUND DECODE
neural sur.
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
Neural Surround processing for any sources.
The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) and analog 2-
channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-
incompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of
XM Satellite Radio.
6
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR.DECODE
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 81 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
82 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
Decoder parameter descriptions
■ Selecting decoders used with sound
field programs
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with
MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).
See page 47 for details about MOVIE sound field
program.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press MOVIE on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired MOVIE
sound field programs.
2 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the
desired decoder used with the selected
sound field program.
You can select from the following decoders
depending on the type of source you are playing and
your personal preference.
y
You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT and
then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control.
Available decoders
Decoder parameter Features
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
PANORAMA
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as
well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
DIMENSION
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front
or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
CENTER WIDTH
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
DTS Neo:6 Music
C.IMAGE
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
4
MOVIE
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Decoder Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for
any sources
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby
Pro Logic II) processing for
movie sources.
The Pro Logic IIx
decoder is not available when “SB
L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see
page 89).
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie
sources
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 82 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
83 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel
sources
If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX
or DTS-ES decoders.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control
repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-
channel playback.
2 Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder
while the name of the decoder is displayed.
Auto AUTO
When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is
input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back
the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.
If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present
in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in
6.1/7.1 channels.
Decoders
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the source you are playing.
Off OFF
Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels.
• “PLIIx Movie” is available only when “SB L/R SP” (see
page 89) is set to “SMLx2” or “LRGx2”.
• Some 6.1/7.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag
that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing
these kinds of discs in 6.1/7.1 channels, select a decoder
manually from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press
EXTD SUR. in the following cases:
– when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88) or “SB L/R SP” (see
page 89) is set to “NONE”.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is being played.
– when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 51) or Pure Direct (see
page 50) mode is selected.
• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to
“AUTO”.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89).
8
EXTD SUR.
TV
SOURCE
AMP
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Decoder Functions
PLIIxMovie
q D+PLIIx Movie
DTS+PLIIx Movie
MPCM+PLIIx Movie
DSD+PLIIx Movie
Plays back multi-channel
sources in 7.1 channels using
the Pro Logic IIx movie
decoder.
PLIIxMusic
q D+PLIIx Music
DTS+PLIIx Music
MPCM+PLIIx Music
DSD+PLIIx Music
Plays back multi-channel
sources in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Pro Logic IIx music
decoder.
DTS ES
DTS 96/24 ES
Plays back DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the DTS-ES
decoder.
DOLBY D EX
DTS+DOLBY EX
MPCM+DOLBY EX
DSD+DOLBY EX
Plays back multi-channel
sources in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Dolby Digital EX
decoder.
Notes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 83 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
84 En
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 32).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust basic system parameters.
Sound menu 2 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
Parameter Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the
crossover frequency.
87
B)SP LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
90
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
90
D)TEST TONE
Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SPEAKER LEVEL and SP
DISTANCE setting.
91
Parameter Features Page
A)EQUALIZER
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
91
B)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
92
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
92
D)AUDIO SET
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.
93
E)HDMI SET
Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals.
93
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 84 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
85 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Input menu 3 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
Option menu 4 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models.
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 42).
Parameter Features Page
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.
94
B)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input source.
95
C)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
96
D)DECODER MODE
Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear
panel of this unit.
96
E)MULTI CH SET
Adjusts the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer, and surround channels
when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
96
Parameter Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.
97
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.
98
C)AUDIO SELECT
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
99
D)DECODER MODE
Selects whether to initialize the settings or to recall the previous settings for the input mode
selected in INPUT MENU.
99
E)PARAM.INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
99
F)ZONE SET
Adjusts the Zone 2 and Zone 3 parameters.
99
G)XM RADIO SET
Displays the current reception level of XM Passport System.
100
H)DOCK SET
Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in
the standby mode.
100
Note
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 85 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
86 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
• If you press PARAMETER during the “SET MENU” operation,
the “SET MENU” operation is canceled.
• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each
parameter setting.
• Press RETURN or l to return to the previous menu level.
You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night
listening mode (see page 53).
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
3 Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
y
You can also press h to enter the selected menu item.
4 Press k / n repeatedly and then press ENTER
to select and enter the desired menu.
The following displays are examples where “SOUND
MENU” is selected.
Using SET MENU
Note
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
2-6
1,7
1
(U.S.A. model)
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNALINFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SET MENU
;AUTO SETUP
. ;MANUAL SETUP
. ;SIGNAL INFO
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
;MANUAL SETUP
.1BASICMENU
2SOUNDMENU
3INPUTMENU
4OPTIONMENU
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
. A)EQUALIZER
B)LFE LEVEL
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
D)AUDIO SET
2 SOUND
MENU 1/2
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
. E)HDMI SET
2 SOUND
MENU 2/2
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 86 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
87 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
5 Press k / n repeatedly and then press ENTER
to select and enter the desired submenu.
The following display is an example where “LFE
LEVEL” is selected.
6 Press k / n to select the desired parameter
and then l / h to change the parameter
settings.
• Press h to increase the value.
• Press l to decrease the value.
7 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings.
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
y
• If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
• When the diameter of the woofer section of the speaker unit is
larger than 16 cm (6.5 in), set the correspondent speaker setting
parameter to “LARGE” (or “LRG”).
LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRONT, BOTH
• Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a
subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
• Select “FRONT” (front) if you did not connect a
subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals
of the front left and right channels, and the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right
speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see
page 87).
• Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.
The low-frequency signals of any source are output
from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML”
(or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-
frequency signals of the front left and right channels
are directed to the front left and right speakers and the
subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see
page 87).
.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
B)LFE
LEVEL
p
p
p
[
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
1 BASIC MENU
. A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)TESTTONE
2 BASIC
MENU
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
SWFRFRONTBOTH
LFE/BASS OUT
[
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 87 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
88 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
• Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front
speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left
and right channels are directed to the speakers selected
in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87).
• Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front
speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. All the front left and right channel signals
are directed to the front left and right speakers.
• When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 87), the
LFE signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-
frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers
regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting.
• When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 87), you
can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of
“FRONT SP” is set to other than “LARGE” in advance, this
unit change the value to “LARGE” automatically.
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the
front left and right speakers.
• Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center
speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/
BASS OUT”.
• Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker
that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All
the center channel signals are directed to the center
speaker.
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 49) and “SUR. B L/R SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”.
• Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left
and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround left and right channels are directed to the
speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left
and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
Notes
SMALLLARGE
FRONT SP
[
NONESMLLRG
CENTER SP
[
NONESMLLRG
SUR. L/R SP
[
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 88 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
89 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Surround back speakers SB L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround
back speakers. The surround back channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
• Select “SMLx1” (small x 1) if you have a small
surround back speaker that does not reproduce low-
frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency
signals of the surround back left and right channels are
directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”
and the rest of the signals are directed to the surround
back left speaker.
• Select “SMLx2” (small x 2) if you have two small
surround back speakers that do not reproduce low-
frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency
signals of the surround back left and right channels are
directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “LRGx1” (large x 1) if you have a large
surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround back left and right
channel signals are directed to the surround back left
speaker.
• Select “LRGx2” (large x 2) if you have two large
surround back speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround back left and right
channel signals are directed to the surround back left
and right speakers.
Presence speakers PRESENCE SP
Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers
connected to this unit.
Choices: NONE, YES
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect presence
speakers.
• Select “YES” (yes) if you connected presence speakers
and want to use them.
Bass cross over CROSS OVER
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89). All frequencies
below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer
or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE
• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
Presence/Surround back channel priority
PRIORITY
Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the
surround back speakers when playing sources that contain
surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP
sound field programs.
Choices: PRNS, SB
• Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channel will be output from the
surround speakers.
• Select “SB” to use the surround back speakers when
surround back channel signals are detected in a
CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals
are output from the front speakers.
SMLx1 SMLx2
SB L/R SP
[
NONEYES
PRESENCE SP
[
FREQ;;;80Hz
CROSS OVER
NORMALREVERSE
02ASUBWOOFER PHASE
[
PRNS SB
PRIORITY
[
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 89 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
90 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 87).
Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting:
FR. L/FR. R/SWFR/PR. L/PR. R: 0 dB
CENT./SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: –1.0 dB
• Select “FR. L” to adjust the balance of the front left
speaker.
• Select “FR. R” to adjust the balance of the front right
speaker.
• Select “CENT.” to adjust the balance of the center
speaker.
• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the balance of the surround
left speaker.
• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the balance of the surround
right speaker.
• Select “SB L” to adjust the balance of the surround
back left speaker.
• Select “SB R” to adjust the balance of the surround
back right speaker.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer.
• Select “PR. L” to adjust the balance of the presence left
speaker.
• Select “PR. R” to adjust the balance of the presence
right speaker.
• “CENT.”, “SUR. L”, “SUR. R”, “SB L”, “SB R”, “SWFR”,
“PR. L” and “PR. R” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see
page 88), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88), “SB.L/R SP” (see
page 89), “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87) and “PRESENCE
SP” (see page 89) are set to “NONE” respectively.
• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SB.L/R
SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 89).
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)
[Other models]: meters (m)
• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Initial setting:
FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/
PRNS R: 3.00m (10.0ft)
CENTER: 2.60m (8.5ft)
SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: 2.40m (8.0ft)
• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front
left speaker.
• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front
right speaker.
• Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center
speaker.
• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround
left speaker.
• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround
right speaker.
• Select “SB L” to adjust the distance of the surround
back left speaker.
• Select “SB R” to adjust the distance of the surround
back right speaker.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer.
• Select “PRNS L” to adjust the distance of the presence
left speaker.
• Select “PRNS R” to adjust the distance of the presence
right speaker.
Notes
.FR.L;;;;;;;;;;
FR.R;;;;;;;;;;
CENT.;;;;;;;;;;
B)SP
LEVEL
-__________+
[]/[]:Up/Down
[p]/[[]:Adjust
p
p
. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet
FRONTL;;;10.0ft
FRONTR;;;10.0ft
CENTER;;;;8.5ft
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
C)SP
DISTANCE
p
p
p
[
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 90 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
91 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• “CENTER”, “SUR. L”, “SUR. R”, “SB L”, “SB R”, “SWFR”,
“PRNS L” and “PRNS R” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP”
(see page 88), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88), “SUR. B L/R SP”
(see page 89), “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87) and
“PRESENCE SP” (see page 89) are set to “NONE”
respectively.
• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/
R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 89).
■ Test tone D)TEST TONE
Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER
SET, SP LEVEL and SP DISTANCE settings.
Choices: ON, OFF
y
If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s
length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening
position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,
calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
• This function is automatically turned off if you exit “BASIC
MENU”.
• If you select “ON” and enter the “SPEAKER SET”, “SP
LEVEL” or “SP DISTANCE” menu, the test tone is output from
the selected speakers.
Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for
video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors
or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are
set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see
page 32).
■ Equalizer A)EQUALIZER
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the
graphic equalizer.
Equalizer select SELECT
Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.
Choices: AUTO PEQ, GEQ, EQ OFF
• Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer
adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32).
• Select “GEQ” to adjust the built-in 7-frequency band
graphic equalizer so that the tonal quality of the
speaker matches. Press ENTER to display the graphic
equalizer screen.
• Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature.
You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO
SETUP” in advance (see page 32). In this case, “AUTO PEQ” is
automatically selected as the default setting.
Notes
Notes
[]/[]:Select
TEST TONE;;;;OFF
D)TEST TONE
)
)
2 SOUND MENU
Note
. A)EQUALIZER
B)LFE LEVEL
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
D)AUDIO SET
2 SOUND
MENU 1/2
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
. E)HDMI SET
2 SOUND
MENU 2/2
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
SELECT;;;;;;;GEQ
A)EQUALIZER
[]/[]:Adjust
[ENTER]:Enter
)
)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 91 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
92 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
Graphic equalizer GEQ
Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R
and surround back L/R, surround back, presence L/R
speakers and the subwoofer with that of the front L/R
speakers. You can adjust 7 frequency bands (63Hz,
160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz).
Choices: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
y
Press k / n to select a frequency band and l / h to adjust the
selected frequency band.
The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is
selected in “SELECT”.
Test tone TEST TONE
Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while
listening to a test tone. To select “TEST TONE”, press n
repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
selected source component.
• Select “ON” to output test tones from the selected
speakers.
■ Low-frequency effect level
B)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Speaker SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
jack.
■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
Speaker SP
Adjusts the speaker compression.
Headphone HP
Adjusts the headphone compression.
Note
.CHANNEL;;FRONTL
63Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB
160Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB
400Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
A)EQUALIZER
-______+
p
p
p[
CHANNEL;;FRONTL
16kHz ;;;;;; 0.0dB
. TESTTONE;;;;OFF
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
A)EQUALIZER
-______+
p
p
p[
Note
.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
B)LFE
LEVEL
p
p
p
[
.SP:MINSTDMAX
HP:MINSTDMAX
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Select
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
p
p
p[
[
[
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 92 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
93 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Audio settings D)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Muting type MUTING TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 41).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
output.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay AUDIO DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Tone bypass TONE BYPASS
Use this feature to select whether the audio output
bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and
“BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 50).
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select “AUTO” if you want the signals to bypass the
tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal
possible.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want the signals to bypass
the tone control circuitry.
■ HDMI set E)HDMI SET
Use this feature to select the component to play back
HDMI audio signals.
Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO
Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on
this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the
HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.
Choices: RX-V1700, OTHER
• Select “RX-V1700” to play back HDMI audio signals
on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the
HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the
rear panel of this unit.
• Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this
unit.
. MUTE TYPE;;;FULL
A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms
TONE BYPASS;AUTO
LE>E
D)AUDIO SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
p
p
[p
Note
[]/[]:Adjust
SUPPORT AUDIO:
RX-V1700
E)HDMI SET
[p
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 93 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
94 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the
input mode or rename the input source.
■ Input/output assignment
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
y
The input source name in parentheses indicates the default
assigned input source.
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C
CMPNT-V IN
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1,
DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX
[B] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1,
DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX
[C] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1,
DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX
For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 1, 2 and 3
COAXIAL IN
Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
V-AU X, MULT I C H
(2) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
V-AU X, MULT I C H
(3) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
V-AU X, MULT I C H
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 4, 5, 6 and 7
OPTICAL IN
Choices: (4) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
MULTI CH
(5) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
MULTI CH
(6) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
MULTI CH
(7) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
MULTI CH
3 INPUT MENU
. E)MULTI CH SET
3 INPUT
MENU 2/2
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
. A)I/OASSIGNMENT
B)INPUT RENAME
C)VOLUME TRIM
D)DECODER MODE
3 INPUT
MENU 1/2
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
.[A];;;;;DVD
(DVD)
[B];;;;;DTV
(DTV)
[C];;;;;CBL/SAT
(CBL/SAT)
CMPNT-V
INPUT
.(1);;;;; CD
(CD)
(2);;;;; DVD
( DVD )
(3);;;;;DVR/VCR2
(DVR/VCR2)
COAXIAL
IN
.(4);;;;;CD
(CD)
(5);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
(6);;;;;DTV
(DTV)
OPTICAL
IN1/2
.(7);;;;;CBL/SAT
(CBL/SAT)
OPTICAL
IN2/2
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 94 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
95 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks 8 and 9
OPTICAL OUT
Choices: (8) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
V-AU X
(9) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
V-AU X
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority
is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
For HDMI IN jacks 1and 2 HDMI IN
Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1,
DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX
[IN2] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1,
DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX
■ Input rename B) INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
y
• This feature is useful when you change the input or output
assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.
• You can also change the name of the input source that appears
in the display window on the remote control. Refer to
“Changing source names in the display window” on page 106”.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the input source
you want to change the name of.
2 Press l / h on the remote control to place
the “_” (underscore) under the space or the
character you want to edit.
3 Press k / n to select the character you want
to use and then press l / h to move to the
next space.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
•Press n to change the character in the following order, or
press k to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
5 Press SET MENU on the remote control to
exit from “INPUT RENAME”.
Notes
.(8);;;;;MD/TAPE
(MD/TAPE )
(9);;;;;;;CD-R
(CD-R)
OPTICAL
OUT
.[IN1];;; DVD
( DVD )
[IN2];;;CBL/SAT
(CBL/SAT)
HDMI IN
DVD-> DVD
[p]/[[]:Position
[]/[]:Chara.
C)INPUT
RENAME
________
p
p
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
XM
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 95 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
96 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: XM, TUNER, PHONO, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE,
DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
V-AUX, DOCK, MULTI CH
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at ZONE OUT
jacks.
■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE
Use to switch the input mode. You can designate the
reassigned digital input jacks for specific audio signals
(DTS, etc.).
Choices: AUTO, DTS
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the
input mode.
■ Multi channel input Setup
E)MULTI CH SET
Use to set the direction of the signals input into the center,
subwoofer and surround channels when a source
component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
If you input 8-channel signals from an external decoder,
use this feature to select jacks for the additional front
signals.
BGV BGV
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR, DVR/VCR 2,
V-AU X, LAST, OFF
• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select
the last selected video source as the background video
source.
• Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video
source in the background.
Input channels INPUT CH
Use this setting to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder.
Choices: 6CH, 8CH
• Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals.
• Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals.
If “ZONE2 AMP” is set to “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” or “BOTH” (see
page 100), no sound is output from the surround back speakers
even if you select “8CH”. In this case, select “6CH” and set the
output setting of the external component to 6 channels.
Front input FRONT
If you selected 8ch in “INPUT CH”, you can select the
analog jacks at which the front signals from an external
decoder will be input.
Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT,
VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX
“FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to
“8CH”.
XM;;;0.0dB
TUNER;;;0.0dB
PHONO;;;0.0dB
CD;;;0.0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
C)VOLUME TRIM
p
p
p
[
D)DECODER MODE
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
p
p
. CD ;;;;AUTO
DVD ;;;;AUTO
DTV ;;;;AUTO
CBL/SAT ;;;;AUTO
p
[
Note
Note
. BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST
INPUTCH;;;;;6CH
E)MULTI CH SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
p
p
p
[
BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST
INPUTCH;;;;;8CH
.FRONT;;;;;;;;DVD
E)MULTI CH SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
p
p
p
[
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 96 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
97 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Use the “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the
parameters in “DISPLAY SET” (except “DIMMER”, “SHORT
MESSAGE”, “ON SCREEN” and “FL SCROLL”) to the factory
presets (see page 119).
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
Control step: 1
•Press l to make the front panel display dimmer.
•Press h to make the front panel display brighter.
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)
Control step: 1
Initial setting: 0
•Press l to raise the position of the OSD.
•Press h to lower the position of the OSD.
Gray back GRAY BACK
Use this feature to display a gray background in your
video monitor when there is no video signal being input.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in your
video monitor when there is no video signal being
input.
• Select “OFF” not to display a gray background in your
video monitor.
• Depending on the video signals being input or the system
setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be
displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to
“OFF”.
• Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not
be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the
picture.
Video conversion V CONV.
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals
input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and
component video signals interchangeably and up-
convert composite and S-video and component video
signals to HDMI video signals.
• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite
video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted to component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• Set “V CONV.” to “ON” to display the sound field parameter
display and short message display.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “V CONV.” to “OFF”.
• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a
game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals
even if you set “V CONV.” to “ON”.
4 OPTION MENU
Note
. A)DISPLAYSET
B)MEMORY GUARD
C)AUDIO SELECT
D)DECODER MODE
4
OPTION
MENU 1/2
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
. E)PARAM. INI
F)ZONE SET
G)XM RADIO SET
H)DOCKSET
4
OPTION
MENU 2/2
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;0
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;0
GRAY BACK;;;;AUTO
VCONV.;;;;;;;;ON
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
A)DISPLAY
SET
p
p
p[
Notes
Notes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 97 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
98 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
Component interlace/progressive up-conversion
CMPNT I/P
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog
interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video
signals input at the composite video, S-video and
component video jacks so that the analog video signals
deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p
are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” to activate the analog interlace/
progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.
• Select “OFF” to deactivate the analog interlace/
progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.
• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the
OSD if “V CONV.” is set to “OFF”.
• If your video monitor does not support analog video signals
with 480p/576p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be
displayed on your video monitor when “CMPNT I/P” is set to
“ON”. Use “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the
“CMPNT I/P” parameter to the factory preset setting (see
page 119).
HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion
HDMI I/P
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI
interlace/progressive up-conversion of the analog video
signals input at the composite video, S-video and
component video jacks so that the analog video signals
deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p
are output at the HDMI OUT jack.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” to activate the HDMI interlace/
progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.
• Select “OFF” to deactivate the HDMI interlace/
progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.
• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the
OSD if “V CONV.” is set to “OFF”.
• When analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution are
up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the
picture quality may worsen.
Short message display
SHORT MESSAGE
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message
display function.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” to activate the short message display
function. The contents of the front panel display appear
at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this
unit.
• Select “OFF” to deactivate the short message display
function.
The short message display does not appear in the following cases:
– when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p,
1080i or 1080p resolutions are input
– When HDMI video signals are input
On-screen display time ON SCREEN
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
XM Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the OSD
after you perform a certain operation.
Choices: ALWAYS, 10SEC, 30SEC
• Select “ALWAYS” to display the OSD unceasingly
during an operation.
• Select “10SEC” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after
you perform a certain operation.
• Select “30SEC” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after
you perform a certain operation.
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL
Use this feature to set whether to display the information
(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel
display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once
when “XM” or “DOCK” is selected as the input source.
Choices: CONT, ONCE
• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”
feature.
• Select “ON” to protect:
– DSP sound field program parameters
– all “SET MENU” items
– all speaker levels
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.
Notes
Notes
Note
Note
OFFON
[]/[]:Adjust
B)MEMORY
GUARD
p
[
[
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 98 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
99 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT
Use this feature to designate the default input mode for the
input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks
when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate input mode.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last input mode used for the connected input
source.
Selecting “LAST” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD
SUR. button on the remote control.
■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for
the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks
when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to
automatically detect the type of input signals and select
the appropriate decoder mode.
• Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder mode used the connected input
source.
Selecting “LAST” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD
SUR. button on the remote control.
■ Parameter initialization E)PARAM.INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
factory settings.
Press the corresponding sound field program selector
buttons on the remote control to select the sound
field
program that you want to initialize.
An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field
program names that have been changed from their initial
factory settings.
Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB,
ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO,
SURROUND DECODE
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 98).
■ Zone set F)ZONE SET
Zone 2 volume ZONE2 VOL
Zone 3 volume ZONE3 VOL
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT
jacks.
Choices: VAR, FIX
• Select “VAR” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or
ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume simultaneously with
VOLUME +/– on the remote control.
• Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3
OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level.
Note
Note
[AUTO LAST
C)AUDIO SELECT
[p]/[[]:Adjust
[AUTO LAST
D)DECODER MODE
[p]/[[]:Adjust
Notes
CLASSICAL
*LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAINMENT
*MOVIE
STEREO
SURROUNDDECODE
Press DSP key
E)PARAM.
INI
. ZONE2 VOL;;;;VAR
ZONE3 VOL;;;;VAR
ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT
ZONE3 AMP;;;;EXT
F)ZONE SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[]/[]:Adjust
p
p
[p
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 99 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
100 En
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP
Zone 3 amplifier ZONE3 AMP
Use to select how the ZONE 2 and/or ZONE 3 speakers
are amplified.
Choices: EXT, [SP1], [SP2], BOTH
• Select “EXT” if you want to connect your Zone 2 or
Zone 3 speakers through an external amplifier
connected to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3
OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “[SP1]” to use the internal surround back
amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your
Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “[SP2]” to use the internal surround amplifier of
this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or
Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP2 speaker terminals
on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “BOTH” to use the internal surround and
surround back amplifiers of this unit when you want to
connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to
both the SP1 and the SP2 speaker terminals on the rear
panel of this unit.
• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu, “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” and “BOTH” cannot be selected.
• When “BOTH” is selected for “ZONE2 AMP”, only “EXT” can
be selected for “ZONE3 AMP”.
• When “BOTH” is selected for “ZONE3 AMP”, only “EXT” can
be selected for “ZONE2 AMP”.
• When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to “[SP1]” or
“[SP2]” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is
output from the surround back speakers.
• When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to “BOTH”
and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output
from both the surround speakers and the surround back speakers
in the main zone.
• When both “ZONE2 AMP” and “ZONE3 AMP” are set to
“[SP1]” or “[SP2]” and Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on, no
sound is output from both the surround speakers and the
surround back speakers in the main zone.
• When you use internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3, some
surround field programs may not work in the same way as when
you do not use the internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
■ XM Radio setting G)XM RADIO SET
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA
Use this feature to check the current reception level of the
XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this
unit (see page 61). For the best reception, orient the XM
Passport System so that a value of 60% or more is
displayed here.
Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%
•
“NONE” is displayed if the XM Passport System is not connected to
this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 61).
• The “XM ANTENNA” parameter cannot be adjusted by using
the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of
the XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit
for a better percentage of the reception level.
■ Dock set H)DOCK SET
Charge on standby STANDBY CHRG
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
standby mode (see page 73).
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed
iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby
mode.
• Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed
iPod only when this unit is turned on.
Notes
Notes
G)XM RADIO SET
.XM ANTENNA;;NONE
H)DOCK SET
.STANDBYCHRG;AUTO
[]/[]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
)
)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 100 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
101 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 103).
■ Controlling this unit
Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this
unit (see page 6).
*1
These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2
These buttons control this unit only when the component
operation mode selector is set to AMP.
■ Controlling a TV
Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your TV.
To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote
control code for DTV or PHONO (see page 103). When
you set the remote control codes for both DTV and
PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV.
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2
These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on
page 102.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
*2
*1
*1
*1
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
DISC SKIP
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER Turns on or off the power.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT Changes the input source.
*1
*1
*2
*2
*2
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
DISC SKIP
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
(U.S.A. model)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 101 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
102 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Controlling other components
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons
or . You must set the appropriate remote control code for
each input source in advance (see page 103). The
following table shows the function of each control button
used to control other components assigned to each input
selector button or . Be advised that some buttons may
not correctly operate the selected component.
y
The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 14
different components.
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons operate your VCR only when you set the appropriate remote control code for VCR 1 (see page 103).
*3
These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 102.
*4
Press and hold to search backward or forward.
*5
Simple remote mode (see page 73)
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
AV
TV
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
7
6
5
4
A
0
9
8
3
1
2
(U.S.A. model)
DVD player/
DVD
recorder
VCR
Cable TV/
Satellite
tuner
TV LD player CD player
MD recorder/
CD recorder
Tape deck Tuner iPod
1 AV P OW E R
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
VCR power
*2
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
2 CH +
TV
channel up*3
Channel up Channel up Channel up
TV
channel up*3
TV
channel up*3
TV
channel up*3
TV
channel up*3
TV
channel up*3
TV
channel up*3
CH –
TV channel
down*3
Channel down Channel down Channel down
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
3 TITLE
Title Title Title Title Band
4 ENTER
Menu enter Menu select Menu select
Subsequent
menu
PRESET/CH k Menu up Menu up Menu up
Preset up
(1 to 8)
Up
PRESET/CH n Menu down Menu down Menu down
Preset down
(1 to 8)
Down
A-E/CAT. l Menu left Menu left Menu left
Preset down
(A to E)
Previous
menu
A-E/CAT. h Menu right Menu right Menu right Direction A/B
Preset up
(A to E)
Subsequent
menu
5 RETURN
Return Return Return Return
6 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
7 ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
VCR search
backward
*2
VCR search
backward
*2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward*4
hh
Search
forward
Search
forward
VCR search
forward
*2
VCR search
forward
*2
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward*4
b
Skip
backward
Chapter/Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Direction
back
Skip
backward
a Skip forward
Chapter/Skip
forward
Skip forward Skip forward
Direction
forward
Skip
forward
REC/
DISC SKIP
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec
VCR rec
*2
VCR rec
*2
Disc skip Rec Rec
s Stop Stop
VCR stop
*2
VCR stop
*2
Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop
e Pause Pause
VCR pause
*2
VCR pause
*2
Pause Pause Pause Pause
Pause
(Play/Pause)*5
p Play Play
VCR play
*2
VCR play
*2
Play Play Play Play
Play
(Play/Pause)*5
8 MENU
Menu Menu Menu
Previous
menu
9 AUDIO
Audio Audio
0 DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display Display
A ENT
Enter Enter/recall Enter
Notes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 102 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
103 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Selecting a component to be controlled
You can select a component to be controlled
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons.
Press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the
desired component.
The name of the component to be controlled appears in the
display window on the remote control.
■ Controlling optional components
(Option mode)
“OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be
programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This area is useful for
programming commands that are to be used only as a part
of a macro function or for components that do not have a
valid remote control code.
To select the option mode, press SELECT n
repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display
window on the remote control.
You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See
page 105 to program buttons operated within this component
control area.
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL
CODES” at the end of this manual.
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input area.
Remote control code default settings
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.
In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.
1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press an input selector button or
to select the input area you want to set up.
Note
SELECT
SELECT
Setting remote control codes
Input area
Library
(component
category)
Manufacturer
Default
code
XM TUNER YAMAHA 2604
TUNER YAMAHA 2607
PHONO TV – –
TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 2602
CD CD YAMAHA 2300
MULTI CH
INPUT
DVD YAMAHA 2100
V-AUX/
DOCK
TUNER YAMAHA 2606
CBL/SAT CABLE – –
MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA 2500
CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 2400
DTV TV – –
VCR 1 VCR – –
DVR/VCR2 DVR YAMAHA 2807
DVD DVD YAMAHA 2100
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
XM
TV
SOURCE
AMP
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 103 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
104 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the
selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in
the display window on the remote control.
y
• You can set a remote control code of a different type of
component to an input area. Press l / h repeatedly to
change the library (component category).
Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR,
L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),
L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable),
L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR
• If you want to setup for another input area, press the input
selector button or , or press SELECT k / n repeatedly to
select the input area.
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
3 Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected component
appears in the display window.
0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set.
4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the
component you want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
5 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window on the remote
control if setting was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window on the remote
control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case,
start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press the input selector button or , or
SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then
repeat steps 2 through 5.
6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
7 Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether
you can control your component using the
remote control.
y
If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your
component has more than one code, try each of them until
you find the correct one.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control
if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or
when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the learn feature (see “Programming
codes from other remote controls”) or use the remote control
supplied with the component.
• Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over
remote control code functions.
Notes
Note
LEARN
Notes
4
3
2
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
LEARN
AV
POWER
or
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 104 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
105 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can program remote control codes from other remote
controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program
functions not included in the basic operations covered by
the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control
code is not available. You can program the function of
other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas
in the following illustration. The buttons can be
programmed independently for each input area.
The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the
operating instructions for the other remote control.
1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press an input selector button or
to select an input area.
Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to SOURCE.
When you set the operation mode selector to AMP and program a
remote control codes from other remote controls, the
programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this
unit.
2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other.
3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the name of the selected input area
(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window
on the remote control.
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control
code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.
4 Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
Programming codes from other
remote controls
Note
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
AV
TV
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
(U.S.A. model)
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
XM
TV
SOURCE
AMP
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
AV
TV
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
(U.S.A. model)
Other remote control
LEARN
V
-
AUX/DOCK
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
DISC SKIP
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
XM MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
(U.S.A. model)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 105 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
106 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
5 Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
“NG” appears in the display window on the remote
control if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start
over from step 4.
y
• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4
and 5.
• If you continuously want to program another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.
6 Press LEARN again to exit the learning
mode.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control
if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or
when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– when the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each
other at the appropriate angle.
– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– when the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
You can change the name of the input source that appears
in the display window on the remote control if you want to
use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is
useful when you have set an input area to control a
different component.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button or to select the input area you want
to rename.
The name of the selected input area appears in the
display window.
2 Press RENAME using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from 2.
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
AV
TV
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
(U.S.A. model) Other remote control
LEARN
Changing source names in the
display window
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
XM
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
(U.S.A. model)
or
RENAME
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 106 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
107 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
3 Press k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing n changes the character as follows:
A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),
/ (slash), and space.
Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.
4 Press h to move the cursor to the next
position.
y
Press l to move the cursor to the previous position.
5 Press ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window on the remote
control if renaming was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window on the remote
control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case,
start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to rename another input area, press
the input selector button or , or press SELECT k / n
repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3
through 5.
6 Press RENAME again to exit the renaming
mode.
“ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if
you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when
you press more than one button simultaneously.
y
This feature is useful when you change the input or output
assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.
Refer to “INPUT RENAME” on page 95.
The macro programming feature makes it possible to
perform a series of operations with the press of a single
button. For example, when you want to play a CD,
normally you would turn on the components, select the
CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The
macro programming feature lets you perform all of these
operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The
buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with
macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(see page 109).
■ MACRO operations
1 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON.
2 Press the desired macro button.
3 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF
when you finish to using the macro
programming operation.
• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does
not accept any other operation until it has completed running
the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing).
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
Note
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
RENAME
Macro programming features
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
AV
TV
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
DISC SKIP
MACRO
MACRO ON/OFF
Macro buttons
(U.S.A. model)
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
MACRO
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
MACRO
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 107 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
108 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Default macro functions
*1
You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC
OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.
*2
When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 103), you can turn on the power of your TV
without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.
*3
When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.
*4
Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD
recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that
component (see page 105) or set a remote control code (see page 103).
Pressing
macro button
To automatically transmit these signals in order
First Second Third
—
—
—
—
—
(*1)
—
—
(CD area) (*4)
—
—
—
(MD/TAPE area) (*4)
(CD-R area) (*4)
—
(VCR 1 area) (*4)
(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4)
(DVD area) (*4)
STANDBY STANDBY
POWER
POWER
(*1)
TV
POWER
(*2)
XM
POWER
XM
POWER
PHONO
POWER
PHONO
TUNER
TUNER
(*3)
CD CD
MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN
V
-
AUX/DOC
K
V
-
AUX/DOC
K
CBL/SA
T
CBL/SA
T
MD/TAP
E
MD/TAP
E
CD-R CD-R
DTV DTV
VCR 1 VCR 1
DVR/VCR
2
DVR/VCR
2
DVD DVD
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 108 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
109 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Programming macro operations
You can program your own macro and use the macro
programming feature to transmit several remote control
commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to
set up remote control codes or perform learning operations
before programming the macro.
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
• We do not recommend programming continuous operations
such as volume control in a macro.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press MACRO using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
2 Press the macro button you want to use to
operate the macro.
The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the
selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear
alternately in the display window on the remote
control.
“AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a
button other than a macro button.
3 Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote
control automatically exits the macro mode. The
following example is for programming the following
procedure:
Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD.
Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER.
Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP.
To change the selected input area, press SELECT k / n.
Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,
whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected input area.
4 Press MACRO again using a ballpoint pen or
similar object when the operation sequence
you want to program is complete.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more
than one button simultaneously.
Notes
Note
MACRO
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER
STANDBY
XM
(U.S.A. model)
Note
Note
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
AV
TV
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
1
2
3
Indicates the
number of macro
steps entered
Flashes alternately so you can
set the next step
MCR 1: DVD
MCR 2: AV POWER
MCR 3: SLEEP
(U.S.A. model)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 109 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
110 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names
and setup remote control ID.
■ Clearing function sets
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press CLEAR by using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“CLEAR” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from step 1.
2 Press k / n to select the clear mode.
L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
input area. The name of a component is shown
after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector
button to select the input area.
L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the
amplifier functions of this unit.
L;ALL Clears all learned functions.
M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the
remote to the factory settings.
3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing
was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display
window on the remote control.
y
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the
button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer
setting, if you have set remote control codes).
• “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to
complete.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
Clearing configurations
Note
CLEAR
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
Notes
CLEAR
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 110 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
111 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in
each control area.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button or to select the input area
containing the function you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name
(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display
window.
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote
control code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step2.
3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object and then press the button
you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing
was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the display
window on the remote control, release the ballpoint
pen or similar object used to press CLEAR to exit the
clearing mode. The remote control returns to the
learning mode.
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 4.
• If you continuously want to clear another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
input area, then repeat step 4.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).
4 Press LEARN again to exit.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if
clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
XM
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
(U.S.A. model)
or
LEARN
Notes
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
(U.S.A. model)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 111 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
112 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Clearing a macro function
You can clear the function programmed for a certain
macro button.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press MACRO using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
2 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the macro
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote
control if clearing was successful.
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 2.
• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you
have set remote control codes).
3 Press MACRO again to exit the macro
programming mode.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if
clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control
if you press more than one button simultaneously.
Note
MACRO
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
Notes
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
(U.S.A. model)
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 112 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
113 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this
unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can
control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.
• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second
and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.
y
• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.
■ Using external amplifiers
To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT terminals and select
“EXT” in “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100).
• Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when “ZONE2 VOL” or “ZONE3 VOL” are set to
“FIX” (see page 99).
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third
room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.
Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components
Notes
OUTOUT
IN
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
OUT
IN
REMOTE
REMOTE
This unit
YAMAHA
component
YAMAHA
component
Infrared signal
receiver
REMOTE OUT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
MONITOR OUT
SP OUT
REMOTE IN
ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT
ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT
REMOTE IN
MAIN
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
Infrared emitter
DVD player
(or other component)
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Second room
(Zone 2)
Third room
(Zone 3)
Main room
(Main zone)
SYSTEM
This unit
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 113 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
114 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit
If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “[SP1]” or “[SP2]”
for “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100).
If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both SP1 and SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “BOTH” for “ZONE2
AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100).
You can select the zone you want to control by using the
control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3
Front panel operations
1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on
the front panel to individually turn on or off
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
2 Press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel
repeatedly to select the zone you want to
control.
Each time you press ZONE CONTROLS, the front
panel display changes as shown below, and the
indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for
approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator
flashes when the main zone is selected.
ZONE2
Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.
ZONE3
Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or
more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.
R
L
+
–
SP2
SINGLE
R
L
+
–
+
–
+
+
–
–
BI-AMP
SURROUND BACK/
PRESENCE
R
L
SP1
Third room
(Zone 3)
This unit
Second room
(Zone 2)
Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROLS
ZONE2
ZONE3
No indicator flashes when the main zone is
selected.
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 114 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
115 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
• You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the
selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,
the currently selected zone mode is automatically
canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROLS again.
• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3
are turned on.
3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone
2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of
Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of
the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3” on page 116 to perform further
operations.
Remote control operations
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SELECT k repeatedly to select the
zone you want to control.
“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display
window on the remote control.
2 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone
2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of
Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of
the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3” on page 116 to perform further
operations.
3 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the
Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.
The input source of Zone 2 and the source available for
recording are always the same.
■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3
using the remote control
POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work
differently depending on the selected zone that appears in
the display window on the remote control.
• When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is
selected , you can turn on the main zone, Zone 2 or
Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually.
• When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns
on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously
and pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode
simultaneously.
• When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN”
appears for a few seconds when POWER or STANDBY is
pressed.
• “ALL” appears in the display window on the remote control
only when SELECT n is pressed.
■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or
set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
press one of the input selector buttons on the
remote control) to select the input source of the
selected zone.
If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2:
name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the
selected input source” is displayed in the display window
on the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected
respectively.
Note
SELECT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
Control mode Display window
POWER
and
STANDBY
Main zone
mode
Name of the selected
input area
Turns on the main
zone only or sets it to
the standby mode.
Zone 2 mode
“ZONE 2” or “2;name
of the selected input
area”
Turns on Zone 2 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
Zone 3 mode
“ZONE 3” or “3;name
of the selected input
area”
Turns on Zone 3 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
All mode
“ALL”
POWER: turns on
the main zone, Zone
2 and Zone 3.
STANDBY: sets the
main zone, Zone 2
and Zone 3 to the
standby mode.
Notes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 115 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
116 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
• Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER
features in the selected zone. For details about the
TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on
page 54.
• Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite
Radio features in the selected zone. For details about
the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM
SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 61.
The selected input source is shared across all zones.
y
You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected
zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently
selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press
ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again.
■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the
volume level of the selected zone.
y
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to
the selected zone.
When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,
VOLUME +/– can be used only when ZONE2 VOL” or “ZONE3
VOL” is set to “VAR” in “ZONE SET” (see page 99).
■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker
level in Zone 2 or Zone 3
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
“BALANCE” and then rotate PROGRAM on the
front panel to adjust the balance of the front left
and right speaker level of the selected zone.
■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
press CH +/– on the remote control to adjust the
high-frequency response (TREBLE) or
TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency response
(BASS) respectively.
y
You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using
TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting
the tonal quality” on page 50.
Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display
window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality
of the corresponding zone (see page 115).
Note
Note
INPUT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
XM
(U.S.A. model)
+
–
VOLUME
VOLUME
or
Note
CONTROL
TONE
PROGRAM
–
+
TV VOL
+
–
CH
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TREBLE
BASS
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 116 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
ADVANCED SETUP
117 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see
page 31).
• Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel
and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select the parameter you want to
adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
See page 118 for a complete list of available
parameters.
4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel
repeatedly to change the selected parameter
setting.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on
this unit.
ADVANCED SETUP
Notes
Using ADVANCED SETUP
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
2,43
1-2,5
(U.S.A. model)
MASTER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
While holding
down
PROGRAM
8
MIN
IMP.SPEAKER
Currently selected
parameter setting
Currently selected
parameter
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 117 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
118 En
ADVANCED SETUP
■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN
• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
■ User presets USER PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 130).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor on the
front panel of this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” if you want to activate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor.
• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor.
We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.
■ Wake on RS-232C access
WAKE ON RS232C
Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-
232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.
Choices: YES, NO
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES
[Other models]: NO
• Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
• Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
■ Remote control AMP ID
RC AMP ID
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
control recognition (see page 104).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “2001”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “2002”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library
code for the remote control (see page 104).
■ Remote control TUNER ID
RC TUNER ID
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for
remote control recognition (see page 121).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “2602”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “2603”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library
code for the remote control (see page 121).
■ Remote control XM ID RC XM ID
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote
control recognition (see page 121).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library
code is set to “2604”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library
code is set to “2605”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library
code for the remote control (see page 121).
SPEAKER
IMP.
Speaker Impedance level
8ΩMIN
Front
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
6ΩMIN
Front
The impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
Notes
Note
Note
Note
Note
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 118 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
119 En
ADVANCED SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP
(Asia and General models only)
Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South
America.
• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.
■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP
Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-AMP
function.
• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP
function.
When BI-AMP is set to ON, the SURROUND BACK terminals
cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the
SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-AMP
connection (see page 17).
■ Video reset VIDEO RESET
Use to initialize the parameter settings for “DISPLAY
SET” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 97).
Choices: YES, CANCEL
The parameter setting for “DIMMER”, “SHORT MESSAGE”,
“ON SCREEN” and “FL SCROLL” is not initialized (see
page 97).
W
hen using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
■ Setting remote control AMP ID
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE.
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object and
then press l / h repeatedly until “L;AMP”
appears in the display window on the remote
control.
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
3 Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected input area
appears in the display window on the remote control.
Note
Note
Setting remote control ID
Notes
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
LEARN
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 119 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
120 En
ADVANCED SETUP
4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the input
area you want to use.
Remote control AMP codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
AMP code for the input area you want to use.
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID
(see page 118).
5 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1.
6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
■ Setting remote control tuner ID or XM ID
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press TUNER or XM on
the remote control to select the tuner or XM
to change the remote control ID.
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object and
then press l / h repeatedly until “L;TUN”
and “TUNER”, or “L;TUN” and “XM”
alternately appear in the display window on
the remote control.
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
3 Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected input area
appears in the display window on the remote control.
AMP library
code
(remote
control
setting)
Function
Remote
control AMP
ID
2001
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2002
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
Note
4
3
2
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
LEARN
Notes
XM
TUNER
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
or
LEARN
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 120 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
121 En
ADVANCED SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the input
area you want to use.
Remote control tuner codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
tuner code for the input area you want to use.
Remote control XM codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
XM code for the input area you want to use.
You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID
or XM ID (see page 118).
5 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1.
6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
Tuner library
code
(remote
control
setting)
Function
Remote
control
tuner ID
2602
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2603
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
XM library
code
(remote
control
setting)
Function
Remote
control XM
ID
2604
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2605
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
Note
4
3
2
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
LEARN
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 121 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
TROUBLESHOOTING
122 En
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
30
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
14
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
21-27
The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
36
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
40
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” while playing a source
encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or
“COAX/OPT”.
40
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control).
38, 41
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
14
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.
41
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
19
“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”
and “HDMI” audio signals are not being
played back on this unit.
Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V1700” in
“MANUAL SETUP”.
93
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 122 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
123 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No picture The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Set “V CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source
components in the same way as you connect your
video monitor to this unit.
97
Non-standard video signals are input.
Short message
displays do not
appears in the video
monitor
“SHORT MESSAGE” is set to “OFF”. Set “SHORT MESSAGE” to “ON”.
98
“GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”. Set “GRAY BACK” to “AUTO”.
97
“V CONV.” is set to “OFF”. Set “V CONV.” to “ON”.
97
The signals input at the HDMI IN1 or
HDMI IN2 jack are being output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
Video signals in the progressive format or
HDTV video signals are being input.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
30, 118
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output.
41
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
14
Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings.
90
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
88
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
“7ch Stereo”) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
45
No sound from the
presence speakers
The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT to turn them on.
49
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
38
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
88
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
49
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
87
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2-
channel source is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
87
The source does not contain low-
frequency signals.
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 123 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
124 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE” and “SB L/R SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SB L/R SP” to a setting
other than “NONE”.
88
“SB L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SB L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”.
89
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
40
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
24
The volume level is
low while a record is
being played.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
Connect your turntable to this unit through an MC-
head amplifier.
24
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
22, 24
Some components cannot record Dolby
Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
24
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”
is set to “ON”.
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
98
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 124 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
125 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
14
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
28
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
56
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
56
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
57, 58
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
56
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises can result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 125 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
126 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
CHECK ANTENNA
The XM Passport and XM Passport Home
Dock are not connected to the XM jack of
this unit or do not work properly.
Check XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock
connections and orient for the best reception level.
61
UPDATING
The XM user encryption code is being
updated.
Wait until the encryption code is updated.
—
NO SIGNAL
The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System for
the best reception level.
61
LOADING
It takes longer than four seconds for audio
or text data to be decoded.
Wait until the decoding process has finished.
—
OFF AIR
The XM Satellite Radio channel you
selected is not currently broadcasting any
signals.
Check the channel number again or select another
XM Satellite Radio channel.
—
<XM> - - -
The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer
available.
- - - / - - -
No artist name or song title is available.
<CAT> - - -
No channels are available for the selected
category.
Select another channel category by pressing
CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on
the remote control) repeatedly.
67
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 126 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
127 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Remote control
■ HDMI
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
9
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
9
The operation mode selector is set
incorrectly.
Set the operation mode selector correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO
area, set it to the TV position.
—
The remote control code was not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using
“LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end
of this manual.
103
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
103
The library code of the remote control and
the remote control ID of this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
corresponding remote control library code.
104, 118
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
105
The remote control
does not learn new
functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
9
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
105
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
—
Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
110
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
DEVICE OVER
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.
—
HDCP ERROR
HDCP authentication failed.
Check that the connected HDMI components support
the HDCP copy protection standards.
—
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 127 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
128 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ iPod
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod
(see page 27).
■ AUTO SETUP
Before AUTO SETUP
Note
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading...
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
27
Try resetting your iPod.
—
Unknown type
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
—
iPod connected
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
Disconnected
Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
27
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
—
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
32
Unplug HP!
Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.
—
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 128 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
129 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
During AUTO SETUP
After AUTO SETUP
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.
• If warning “W-1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
• If warning “W-2” or “W-3” appears, no corrections are made.
• If error “E-10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections.
14
E-2:NO SURR.SP
A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections.
14
E-3:NO PRNS. SP
A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections.
14
E-4:SBR->SBL
Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
Connect the surround back speaker to the
LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS
terminal if you only have one surround
back speaker.
14
E-5:NOISY
Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet
environment.
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.
—
E-6:CHECK SUR.
Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use
surround back speakers.
14
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
32
E-8:NO SIGNAL
The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.
Check the microphone setting. 32
Check the speaker connections and
placement.
14
E-9:USER CANCEL
The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
32
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR
An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
32
Warning message Cause Remedy
See
page
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper
polarity (+ or –).
14
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.
—
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.
Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.
—
Check the speaker connections. 14
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 32
Notes
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 129 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
130 En
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup
menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it
outward to the OFF position.
1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel
and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “PRESET”.
4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel
repeatedly to select “RESET”.
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to
confirm your selection and turn off this unit.
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Notes
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
TUNING
PRESET/
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
ON/OFF
2,43
1-2,5
(U.S.A. model)
MASTER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
While holding
down
PROGRAM
CANCEL
USERPRESET
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
RESET
USERPRESET
MASTER
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 130 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
GLOSSARY
131 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a
speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section
of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the
combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement
each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.
This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much
simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence
the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high
pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes
frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above
the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes
frequencies above its cutoff.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P
B
and P
R signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ Dialogue normalization
Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or
DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same
average listening level so the user does not have to change
the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS
programs.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-
over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game
sources.
GLOSSARY
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 131 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
132 En
GLOSSARY
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
■ DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio
signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio
CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at
a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while
noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce
distortion, a common occurrence with very high
quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling
rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered
by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original
96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-
quality full-motion video for music programs and motion
picture soundtracks on DVD video.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,
front left and right, center, surround left and right, and
LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).
This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel
to the existing 5.1-channel format.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such
as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video
monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI
transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-
channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements
of content providers and system operators. For further
information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ Neural Surround
Neural Surround
™
represents the latest advancement in
surround technology and has been adopted by XM
Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround
recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural
Surround
™
employs psychoacoustic frequency domain
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound
stage with superior channel separation and localization of
audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to
7.1 multi-channel surround playback.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 132 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
133 En
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 133 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION
134 En
■ Elements of a sound field
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field in addition to the
direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s
instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any
size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is
exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound
field processor.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to
enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
■ Sound output from each speaker
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of
audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the
table below to understand the speaker layout for each
sound field program. For details about the sound output
from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to
“SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD
PROGRAM” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual.
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from
speakers depending on the type of input source being played
back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be
used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of
movies, such as special sound effects, etc.
y
Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you
can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back
speakers (see page 45).
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION
Note
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 134 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
135 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the
Parametric EQ settings (see page 91), to optimize the
frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to
match your listening environment. YPAO uses a
combination of the following three parameters
(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise
adjustment of the frequency characteristics.
■ Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave
increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.
■ Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB
between –20 and +6 dB.
■ Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the
values 0.5 and 10.
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your
listening requirements using a combination of the above
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as
in Figure 1).
Figure 1
Figure 2
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
Gain
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Band 1
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Gain
Frequency
Band 1
Band 2
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Original frequency
characteristic
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 135 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
SPECIFICATIONS
136 En
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 130 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................................... 160/195/255/335 W
• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 175 W
• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 180 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω ....................................................................................... 0.9 dB
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................................... 130 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.4 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω
PRE OUT ................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................ 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct ........... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to OUT (REC)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .......................................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ..................... 81 dB or more
[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD, etc.
(5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R .............. 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 3.5 kHz
• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 450 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 2.0 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) .......... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format (Gray Back)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ..................... NTSC
[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL
• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)
.................................................................................... 60 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ....... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 0.2/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
Stereo .................................................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response
Stereo ............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
SPECIFICATIONS
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 136 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
137 En
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General and Asia model]
....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Other models] .................................................................... 500 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less
[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ....................... 0.33 W or less
[Other models] .......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]
6ch, 10% THD .................................................................. 1100 W
• AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[Asia, General and China models] ........ 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[Australia and U.K. models] ..... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm
(17.1 x 6.7 x 17.3 in)
• Weight .................................................................. 17.0 kg (38.8 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries
Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want
you to get the most out of your equipment by
playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound
come through loud and clear without annoying
blaring or distortion – and, most importantly,
without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage
from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late,
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure
from excessive volume levels.
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 137 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
APPENDIX-i
SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
*1
/ / : OFF
*2
/ / : ON, PRIORITY: PRNS
*3
/ / : ON, PRIORITY: SB
Front left speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker
Center speaker Surround right speaker Presence left speaker
Front right speaker Surround back left speaker Presence right speaker
Speaker from which sound is being output
Speaker from which no sound is being output
Program
Input source
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
1
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
2
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
3
CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
Hall in Vienna
Hall in
Amsterdam
Church in
Freiburg
Chamber
LIVE/CLUB
Village
Vanguard
Warehouse Loft
Cellar Club
The Roxy
Theatre
The Bottom Line
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
Action Game
Roleplaying
Game
Music Video
Recital/Opera
MOVIE
STANDARD
(PRO LOGIC)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
L
SL
SBR
C SR PL
R
SBL
PR
EX
PL x
EX
PL x
EX
PL x
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page i Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
APPENDIX-ii
MOVIE
STANDARD
(PLII Movie)
(PLIIx Movie)
(Neo:6 Cinema)
PRIORITY: PRNS (Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
PRIORITY: SB
MOVIE
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
Drama
Mono Movie
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Monaural playback
STEREO
7ch Stereo
Program
Input source
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
1
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
2
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
3
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL SR
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
APPENDIX-iii
SURROUND DECODE
PRO LOGIC
PRO LOGIC Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
SURROUND DECODE
PLII Movie
PLII Music
PLII Game
Movie/Game Movie/Music/Game Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Music
SURROUND DECODE
PLIIx Movie
PLIIx Music
PLIIx Game
Movie/Game Movie/Music/Game Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Music
Program
Input source
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
1
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
2
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
3
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
APPENDIX-iv
SURROUND DECODE
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Cinema Cinema/Music Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Music
SURROUND DECODE
neural sur.
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
STRAIGHT
Monaural playback
PURE DIRECT
Monaural playback
Program
Input source
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
1
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
2
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
3
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iv Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
APPENDIX-v
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
CABLE
ABC 0030, 0035
AMERICAST 0926
BELL SOUTH 0926
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
0303
BRITISH TELECOM 0030
CABLE & WIRELESS
1095
DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
DIRECTOR 0503
FILMNET 0470
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837,
GOLDSTAR 0171
HAMLIN 0036, 0300
JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,
0837
LG 0171
MNET 0470
MEMOREX 0027
MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,
1133
NTL 1095
NOOS 0844
ONO 1095
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
0030
PACE 0264, 1087, 1095
PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134
PARAGON 0027
PHILIPS 0332, 0344
PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,
1904
PULSAR 0027
QUASAR 0027
REGAL 0300, 0306
RUNCO 0027
SAGEM 0844
SAMSUNG 0027, 0171
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
SONY 1033
STARCOM 0030
SUPERCABLE 0303
TS 0030
TELE+1 0470
TELEWEST 1095
TORX 0030
TOSHIBA 0027
TRANS PX 0303
UNITED CABLE 0030
ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926
CD PLAYER
AIWA 0184
ARCAM 0184
AUDIO RESEARCH 0184
AUDIO TON 0184
AUDIOLAB 0184
AUDIOMECA 0184
CAIRN 0184
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
0056
CARVER 0184, 0206
CYRUS 0184
DKK 0027
DMX ELECTRONICS
0184
DENON 0900
DYNAMIC BASS 0206
EMERSON 0332
FISHER 0206
GENEXXA 0059, 0332
GOODMANS 0332
GRUNDIG 0184
HARMAN/KARDON
0184, 0200
HITACHI 0059
JVC 0099
KENWOOD 0055, 0064
KRELL 0184
LXI 0332
LINN 0184
MCS 0056
MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332
MARANTZ 0056, 0184
MATSUI 0184
MEMOREX 0332
MERIDIAN 0184
MICROMEGA 0184
MIRO 0027
MISSION 0184
MYRYAD 0184
NAD 0027
NSM 0184
NAIM 0184
OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,
0206, 0332
PANASONIC 0056
PHILIPS 0184
PIONEER 0059, 0332
POLK AUDIO 0184
PROTON 0184
QED 0184
QUAD 0184
QUASAR 0056
RCA 0059, 0206, 0332
REALISTIC 0206
REVOX 0184
ROTEL 0184
SAE 0184
SANSUI 0184, 0332
SANYO 0206
SCOTT 0332
SEARS 0332
SHARP 0064
SIMAUDIO 0184
SONIC FRONTIERS 0184
SONY 0027
SYMPHONIC 0332
TAG MCLAREN 0184
TANDY 0059
TECHNICS 0056
THORENS 0184
THULE 0184
UNIVERSUM 0184
VICTOR 0099
WARDS 0184
YAMAHA 2300, 2301
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0653
MARANTZ 0653
PHILIPS 0653
YAMAHA 2400
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
0757
ALBA 0744
AMSTRAD 0740
APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,
0782, 0821, 0823,
0857, 1127
BLAUPINKT 0744
BLUE PARADE 0598
BUSH 0740
CENTREX 0699
CLATRONIC 0815
CYBERHOME 0741
DVD2000 0548
DAEWOO 0811, 0797
DANSAI 0797
DECCA 0797
DENON 0517
DIAMOND 0795
DIGITREX 0699
EMERSON 0618
ENTERPRISE 0618
FISHER 0697
GE 0549, 0744
GO VIDEO 0742
GOLDSTAR 0768
GRADIENTE 0678
GREENHILL 0744
GRUNDIG 0566
HITACHI 0600, 0691
HITEKER 0699
JVC 0585, 0650
KLH 0744
KENWOOD 0517, 0561
KOSS 0678
LG 0768
LIMIT 0795
MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702
MARANTZ 0566
MEMOREX 0858
MICO 0750
MICROSOFT 0549
MINTEK 0744
MITSUBISHI 0548
MUSTEK 0757
NESA 0744
ONKYO 0530
ORITRON 0678
PALSONIC 0699
PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389
PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,
0881
PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,
0659
POLK AUDIO 0566
PROSCAN 0549
QWESTAR 0678
RCA 0549, 0598, 0744
ROTEL 0650
SM ELECTRONIC 0757
SAMSUNG 0600
SANYO 0697
SHARP 0657
SHERWOOD 0797
SHINSONIC 0560
SLIM ART 0811
SONY 0560, 0891
SYLVANIA 0702
TATUNG 0797
TEAC 0598, 0744
TECHNICS 0517
THETA DIGITAL 0598
THOMSON 0549
TOSHIBA 05 30
URBAN CONCEPTS 0530
XBOX 0549
YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,
2100
ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768
ZEUS 0811
DVD RECORDER
HITACHI 2815
PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802
PHILIPS 2808
PIONEER 2804, 2805, 2806
SHARP 2812, 2813
SONY 2809, 2810, 2811
TOSHIBA 28 03
VICTOR 2814
YAMAHA 2807
LD PLAYER
CARVER 0091
DENON 0086
MARANTZ 0091
MITSUBISHI 0086
NAD 0086
NAGSMI 0086
OPTIMUS 0086
PHILIPS 0091
PIONEER 0086
SALORA 0091
SONY 0228
TELEFUNKEN 0086
YAMAHA 2200
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0708
ONKYO 0895
SHARP 0888
SONY 0517
YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC 0558
AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,
1432, 1668
ALCO 1417
ANAM 1636
APEX DIGITAL 1284
AUDIOLAB 1216
AUDIOTRONIC 1216
AUDIOVOX 1417
BOSE 1256
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page v Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
APPENDIX-vi
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
1397
CAPETRONIC 0558
CARVER 1116, 1216
CENTREX 1284
DENON 1387
FERGUSON 0558
FINE ARTS 1216
GRUNDIG 1216
HARMAN/KARDON
0137, 1331
INTEGRA 0162, 1325
JBL 0137, 1333
JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,
1522
KLH 1417, 1439
KENWOOD 1054, 1340
MCS 0066
MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,
1296,
MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,
1316
MICROMEGA 1216
MUSICMAGIC 1116
MYRYAD 1216
NAD 0347
NORCENT 1416
ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325
OPTIMUS 0558, 1050
PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,
1790
PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,
1295, 1296, 1310,
1316
PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,
1411
POLK AUDIO 1316
PROSCAN 1281
QUASAR 0066
RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,
1417, 1636,
SABA 0558
SANSUI 1116
SCHNEIDER 0558
SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,
1685, 1785
STEREOPHONICS 1050
SUNFIRE 1340
TEAC 1417
TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,
1545
TELEFUNKEN 0558
THOMSON 1281
THORENS 1216
UHER 0558
VENTURER 1417
VICTOR 0101
WARDS 0041, 0185
YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,
2601
(TUNER ID1) 2602
(TUNER ID2) 2603
(XM ID1) 2604
(XM ID2) 2605
(iPod) 2606
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT 1327
ABSAT 0150
ALBA 0482
ALPHASTAR 0799
AMSTRAD 0874
ASTON 0169, 1156
ASTRO 0200
ATSAT 1327
AVALON 0423
BLAUPUNKT 0200
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
0874, 1202
CANAL DIGITAL 0880
CANAL SATELLITE 0880
CANAL+ 0880
CHAPARRAL 0243
CITYCOM 1203
CONNEXIONS 0423
CROSSDIGITAL 1136
CYRUS 0227
D-BOX 0750, 1154
DMT 1102
DNT 0227, 0423
DAERYUNG 0423
DAEWOO 1323
DIGENIUS 0326
DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,
0666, 0751, 0776,
0846, 1103, 1136,
1169, 1776, 1883
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
0802, 1032
DISHPRO 0802, 1032
DISTRATEL 0111
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
1264
ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,
0802, 0880, 0898,
1032, 1113
ENGEL 1044
EXPRESSVU 0802
FTE 0890
FINLUX 0482
FRACARRO 0898
FUBA 0423
GE 0593
GOI 0802
GALAXIS 0890, 1138
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0896
GOLD BOX 0880
GRUNDIG 0200, 0874
HTS 0802
HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423
HITACHI 0482, 0846
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
0776, 1169, 1776
HUMAX 0890, 1203
INVIDEO 0898
JVC 0802
KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,
0276, 0685, 1248
KREISELMEYER 0200
LABGEAR 1323
LOGIX 1044
LORENZEN 0326
MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751
MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,
1110
MARANTZ 0227
MEDIASAT 0880
MEMOREX 0751
METRONIC 0111
MITSUBISHI 0776
MOTOROLA 0896
MYRYAD 0227
NEXT LEVEL 0896
NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,
1154, 1250, 1750
OCTALTV 1032
ORBITECH 1127
PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,
1350
PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,
1347
PANDA 0482
PAYSAT 0751
PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,
0749, 0751, 0776,
0880, 1103, 1169,
1776
PIONEER 0880
PROMAX 0482
PROSCAN 0419, 0593
RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,
0882
RFT 0227
RADIOSHACK 0896
RADIOLA 0227
RADIX 0423
SKY 0874, 0883, 1202
SM ELECTRONIC 1227
SABRE 0482
SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280
SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,
1319
SAT CONTROL 1327
SATSTATION 1110
SCHWAIGER 1138
SEEMANN 0423
SIEMENS 0200
SONY 0666, 0874, 1666
STAR CHOICE 0896
STRONG 1327
TPS 0847, 1280
TANTEC 0482
TECHNISAT 1126, 1127
TELESTAR 1127
THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,
1318
TOPFIELD 1233
TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776
ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666
UNIDEN 0749, 0751
UNIVERSUM 0200
VENTANA 0227
WISI 0200, 0423, 0482
XSAT 0150
ZEHNDER 1102
ZENITH 0883, 1883
TAPE DECK
AIWA 0056
CARVER 0056
GRUNDIG 0056
HARMAN/KARDON
0056
MAGNAVOX 0056
MARANTZ 0056
MYRYAD 0056
OPTIMUS 0054
PHILIPS 0056
PIONEER 0054
POLK AUDIO 0056
RCA 0054
REVOX 0056
SANSUI 0056
SONY 0270
THORENS 0056
WARDS 0054
YAMAHA 2700,2701
TV
AGB 0543
AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,
0119, 0120, 0135,
0205, 0207, 0478
ASA 0131
AWA 0036
ACURA 0036
ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680
ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490
ADVENT 0788
AIKO 0119
AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,
0388, 0543, 0729,
0839
AKURA 0291
ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,
0695
AMERICA ACTION 0207
AMPRO 0778
AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,
0398, 0439, 0460,
0543
ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277
ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677
ANITECH 0036
APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,
0794
AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136
BANG & OLUFSEN 0592
BASIC 0036
BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539
BAYSONIC 0207
BEAUMARK 0205
BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,
0742
BELL & HOWELL 0181
BEON 0064
BLAUPUNKT 0222
BLUE SKY 0695, 1064
BONDSTEC 0274
BRADFORD 0207
BRANDT 0136, 0362
BROKSONIC 0263, 0490
BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,
0401, 0695, 1064
CCE 0064
CGE 0274
CTC 0274
CXC 0207
CANDLE 0057
CARNIVALE 0057
CARVER 0081, 0197
CASCADE 0036
CATHAY 0064
CELEBRITY 0027
CELERA 0792
CENTURION 0064
CHANGHONG 0792
CHING TAI 0036, 0119
CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,
0207
CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207
CIMLINE 0036
CINERAL 0119, 0478
CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119
CLARION 0207
CLARIVOX 0064
CLATRONIC 0274, 0397
CONDOR 0347, 0397
CONRAC 0835
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page vi Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
APPENDIX-vii
CONTEC 0036, 0207
CRAIG 0207
CROSLEY 0081
CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,
0397, 0445
CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,
0081, 0087, 0120,
0172, 0181, 0193,
0478, 0729, 1174,
1374
DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,
0119, 0135, 0181,
0197, 0205, 0207,
0401, 0478, 0650,
0661, 1688
DANSAI 0064
DAYTON 0036
DE GRAAF 0235, 0575
DECCA 0064, 0543
DENON 0172
DIGATRON 0064
DIXI 0036, 0064
DUMONT 0044
DWIN 0747, 0801
ECE 0064
ELBE 0286
ELECTROBAND 0027
ELIN 0064, 0575
ELITE 0347
ELTA 0036
EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,
0263, 0388, 0490,
0650
ENVISION 0057,0840
EPSON 0860
ERRES 0064
ETHER 0036, 0057
ETRON 0036
EUROPHON 0543
FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,
0265, 0314, 0362,
0587
FIDELITY 0388
FINLANDIA 0235, 0373
FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,
0373, 0543
FIRSTAR 0036, 0263
FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695
FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,
0397
FLINT 0482
FORMENTI 0064, 0347
FORTRESS 0120
FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291
FUJITSU 0710, 0836
FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291
FUTURETECH 0207
GE 0057, 0074, 0078,
0119, 0205, 0207,
0478, 0587, 1174,
1374, 1481
GEC 0064, 0543
GATEWAY 1782, 1783
GELOSO 0036
GENEXXA 0190
GIBRALTER 0044, 0057
GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,
0181, 0205, 0404
GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,
0661
GOREMJE 0397
GRADIENTE 0080, 0197
GRAETZ 0190, 0388
GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,
0543
GRANDIN 0637
GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,
0583, 0614
GRUNPY 0207
HCM 0036, 0439
HALLMARK 0205
HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207
HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,
0455, 0583
HANTAREX 0543
HARMAN/KARDON 0081
HARVARD 0207
HAVERMY 0120
HELLO KITTY 0478
HINARI 0036, 0064
HISAWA 0482
HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,
0132, 0136, 0172,
0190, 0205, 0252,
0383, 0508, 0575,
0605, 1172, 1283
HUA TUN 0036
HUANYU 0401
HYPSON 0064, 0291
ICE 0291, 0398
ITS 0398
ITT 0190, 0388, 0575
IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445
INDIANA 0064
INFINITY 0081
INGELEN 0190
INNO HIT 0543
INNOVA 0064
INTEQ 0044
INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,
0388, 0539
INTERVISION 0064, 0291,
0404
JBL 0081
JCB 0027
JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,
0680, 0710
JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,
0183, 0263
JENSEN 0788
KEC 0207
KTV 0057, 0207
KAISUI 0036
KAPSCH 0190
KARCHER 0637
KATHREIN 0583
KENDO 0064
KENWOOD 0057
KNEISSEL 0286, 0462
KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207
KORPEL 0064
KOYODA 0036
L&S ELECTRONIC 0835
LG 0057, 0064, 0087,
0135, 0205, 0741
LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0205
LEYCO 0064, 0291
LIESENK & TTER 0064
LOEWE 0539
LUXOR 0383, 0388
M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,
0131, 0132, 0136,
0190, 0314, 0373,
0401, 0507
MGA 0057, 0177, 0205
MTC 0057, 0087, 0539
MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543
MAGNAFON 0543
MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,
1481
MANESTH 0291, 0347
MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,
0583
MARK 0064
MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,
0398, 0514, 0543
MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677
MEDIATOR 0064
MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064
MEGATRON 0172, 0205
MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,
0205, 0277, 0490,
1064
METZ 0474
MICROMAXX 0835
MICROSTAR 0835
MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078
MINERVA 0514
MINOKA 0439
MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,
0177, 0181, 0205,
0207, 0263, 0277,
0539, 0863, 1277
MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,
0636
MOTOROLA 0120
MULTITECH 0036, 0207
MYRYAD 0583
NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,
0893
NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,
0181, 0183, 0197,
0205, 0482, 0524,
1731
NEI 0064
NTC 0119
NECKERMANN 0064, 0583
NETSAT 0064
NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,
0205
NIKKAI 0064, 0291
NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205
NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,
0575, 0658
NORCENT 0775, 0851
NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,
0587
OCEANIC 0190, 0388
ONWA 0207, 0460
OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,
0677
OPTONICA 0120
ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,
0490, 0543
OSAKI 0291, 0439
OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,
0539, 0583
PALLADIUM 0397, 0445
PANAMA 0291
PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,
0190, 0277, 0677,
1437
PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347
PAUSA 0036
PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,
0087, 0183, 0205,
1374
PERDIO 0347
PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,
0172, 0205, 0207,
0274, 0490, 1688
PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,
0078, 0081, 0119,
0135, 0205, 0401,
0583, 0717, 1481
PHONOLA 0064
PILOT 0057
PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,
0314, 0706, 0787,
0893
PORTLAND 0119
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0543
PRIMA 0788
PRISM 0078
PROFEX 0036, 0388
PROSCAN 0074
PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,
0291, 0445, 0695
PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205
PULSAR 0044
QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677
QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
R-LINE 0064
RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,
0117, 0119, 0205,
0706, 1074, 1174,
1274, 1374, 1474,
1481, 1574
RFT 0455
RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,
0181, 0205, 0207
RADIOLA 0064
RADIOMARELLI 0543
REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,
0207
REDIFFUSION 0388
REOC 0741
REVOX 0064
REX 0190, 0286, 0291
ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445
RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,
0630
SBR 0064
SEG 0291, 0695
SEI 0543
SKY 0064
SSS 0207
SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,
0362
SACCS 0265
SAGEM 0637
SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543
SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,
0575
SAMBERS 0543
SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,
0120, 0181, 0198,
0205, 0677, 1782
SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,
0087, 0117, 0119,
0181, 0205, 0291,
0397, 0583, 0614,
0645, 0729, 0793,
0839, 0841
SANSEI 0478
SANSUI 0490
SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,
0235, 0366, 0826
SCHAUB LORENZ 0388
SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,
0695
SCOTCH 0205
SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page vii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
APPENDIX-viii
SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0198, 0205
SELECO 0190, 0286
SEMIVOX 0207
SEMP 0183
SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677
SHEN YING 0036, 0119
SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263
SIAREM 0543
SIEMENS 0064, 0222
SINUDYNE 0543
SKANTIC 0383
SKYGIANT 0207
SKYWORTH 0064
SOLAVOX 0190
SONITRON 0235
SONOKO 0036, 0064
SONOLOR 0190, 0235
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,
1127, 1532, 1678
SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207
SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445
SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,
0183, 0205
SQUAREVIEW 0198
STANDARD 0036
STARLITE 0207
STERN 0190, 0286
SUPREME 0027
SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198
SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207
SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0478
SYSLINE 0064
T + A 0474
TCM 0835
TMK 0205
TNCI 0044
TVS 0490
TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205
TAI YI 0036
TANDY 0120, 0190
TASHIKO 0119, 0677
TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,
0081, 0087, 0181,
0183, 0543
TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,
0439, 0445, 0482,
0695, 1064
TEC 0274
TECHNEMA 0347
TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677
TECHWOOD 0078
TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0291,
0680
TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,
0177, 0207
TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,
0362, 0652, 0729
TELEMEISTER 0347
TELETECH 0036
TENSAI 0347
TERA 0057
THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,
0652, 1474
THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,
0535, 0645, 0677,
0859, 1283, 1383,
1683, 1731
TRIUMPH 0543
TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119
UHER 0347
UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,
0291, 0373, 0397,
0519
VECTOR RESEARCH
0057
VESTEL 0064
VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,
0680
VIDEOSAT 0274
VIDIKRON 0081
VIDTECH 0205
VIEWSONIC 1782
VISION 0347
VOXSON 0190
WALTHAM 0383
WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,
0893
WATSON 0064, 0347
WAYCON 0183
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0064, 0347, 0490,
0650
YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677,
0796, 0860,
2900 (projector),
2901 (projector),
2903,
2904 (projector)
YAPSHE 0277
YOKO 0064, 0291
ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,
0490
VCR
ASA 0064, 0108
ADMIRAL 0075
ADVENTURA 0027
AIKO 0305
AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,
0375, 0379
AKAI 0068, 0342
AKIBA 0099
ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,
0379
AMERICA ACTION 0305
AMERICAN HIGH 0062
AMSTRAD 0027
ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,
0305, 0507
ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589
ANITECH 0099
ASHA 0267
ASUKA 0064
AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305
BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131
BASIC LINE 0099, 0305
BEAUMARK 0267
BELL & HOWELL 0131
BLAUPUNKT 0253
BRANDT 0347
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
0068
BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506
BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379
CCE 0099, 0305
CGE 0027
CALIX 0064
CANON 0062
CARVER 0108
CIMLINE 0099
CINERAL 0305
CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305
COLT 0099
COMBITECH 0379
CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,
0267
CROWN 0099, 0305
CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,
0087, 1062
CYBERNEX 0267
CYRUS 0108
DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,
0669, 1305
DANSAI 0099
DE GRAAF 0069
DECCA 0027, 0108
DENON 0069
DUAL 0068
DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131
DYNATECH 0027
ESC 0267, 0305
ELCATECH 0099
ELECTROHOME 0064
ELECTROPHONIC 0064
EMEREX 0059
EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,
0070, 0072, 0211,
0267, 0305, 1305,
1506
FERGUSON 0068, 0347
FIDELITY 0027
FINLANDIA 0108, 0131
FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,
0131
FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,
0099
FISHER 0074, 0131
FUJI 0060, 0062
FUJITSU 0027, 0072
FUNAI 0027
GE 0062, 0087, 0267,
0834, 1062, 1087
GEC 0108
GARRARD 0027
GENERAL 0072
GO VIDEO 0459
GOLDHAND 0099
GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,
1264
GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,
0305
GRADIENTE 0027
GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267
GRANADA 0108, 0131
GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099
GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,
0374
HCM 0099
HI-Q 0074
HANSEATIC 0064
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0027
HARMAN/KARDON 0108
HARWOOD 0099
HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379
HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,
0069, 0267
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0069
HYPSON 0099
ITT 0068, 0131, 0267
ITV 0064, 0305
IMPERIAL 0027
INTERFUNK 0108
JVC 0068, 0072, 0094
JENSEN 0068
KEC 0064, 0305
KLH 0099
KAISUI 0099
KENWOOD 0068, 0094
KODAK 0062, 0064
KOLIN 0068, 0070
KORPEL 0099
LG 0064, 0069, 0072,
0507
LXI 0064
LENCO 0305
LEYCO 0099
LLOYD’S 0027
LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589
LOGIK 0099, 0267
LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131
M ELECTRONIC 0027
MEI 0062
MGA 0070, 0267
MGN TECHNOLOGY
0267
MTC 0027, 0267
MAGNASONIC 1305
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,
0108, 1808
MAGNIN 0267
MANESTH 0072, 0099
MARANTZ 0062, 0108
MARTA 0064
MATSUI 0375, 0379
MATSUSHITA 0062
MEDION 0375
MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,
0066, 0074, 0075,
0131, 0267, 0334,
0375, 1264
MEMPHIS 0099
METZ 0064, 0374, 1589
MINOLTA 0069
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY 0027
MYRYAD 0108
NAD 0131
NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL 0253
NECKERMANN 0108
NESCO 0099
NEWAVE 0064
NIKKO 0064
NOBLEX 0267
NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE 0068, 0347
OCEANIC 0027, 0068
OKANO 0342, 0375
OLYMPUS 0062, 0253
OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND 0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX 0069
PERDIO 0027
PHILCO 0062
PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA 0108
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page viii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
APPENDIX-ix
PILOT 0064
PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC 0267
PROLINE 0027
PROSCAN 0087, 1087
PROTEC 0099
PULSAR 0066
PYE 0108
QUASAR 0062, 1062
QUELLE 0108
RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK 0027
RADIOLA 0108
RADIX 0064
RANDEX 0064
REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC 0375
REPLAYTV 0641, 0643
REX 0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO 0066
SBR 0108
SEG 0267
SEI 0108
STS 0069
SABA 0068, 0347
SALORA 0070
SAMPO 0064, 0075
SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY 0066, 0075
SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE 0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO 0068
SEMP 0072
SHARP 0075, 0834
SHINTOM 0099, 0131
SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA 0064
SINGER 0072, 0099
SINUDYNE 0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI 0375
SUNSTAR 0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK 0267
TANDY 0027, 0131
TASHIKO 0027, 0064
TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS 0062, 0253
TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA 0068
TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347
TENOSAL 0099
TENSAI 0027
THOMAS 0027
THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN 0068, 0131
TIVO 0645, 0663
TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER 0267
UNITECH 0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR 0072
VICTOR 0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC 0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN 0027
WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA 0068
YAMISHI 0099
YOKAN 0099
YOKO 0267
ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ix Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page x Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2006 All rights reserved.
RX-V1700
Printed in Malaysia WH63550
RX-V1700
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
RX-V1700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, May 8, 2006 3:54 PM
Documenttranscriptie
RX-V1700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, May 8, 2006 3:54 PM U RX-V1700 RX-V1700 AV Receiver © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WH63550 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page i Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. iii 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTENTS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13 Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 32 BASIC OPERATION Basic procedure ....................................................... 38 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 40 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 41 Using your headphones............................................ 41 Muting the audio output........................................... 41 Displaying the input source information ................. 42 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source.................. 43 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 43 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS............................. 44 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 44 Sound field program descriptions............................ 45 Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 49 USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 50 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 50 Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 50 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 51 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo............................................... 51 Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode .................................................... 52 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 53 USING iPod ...........................................................73 Controlling iPod ...................................................... 73 RECORDING ........................................................75 ADVANCED OPERATION ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS.....76 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 76 Selecting decoders ................................................... 80 CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) ..........................................84 Using SET MENU................................................... 86 1 BASIC MENU...................................................... 87 2 SOUND MENU.................................................... 91 3 INPUT MENU...................................................... 94 4 OPTION MENU................................................... 97 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................101 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components .......................................... 101 Setting remote control codes ................................. 103 Programming codes from other remote controls ... 105 Changing source names in the display window..... 106 Macro programming features ................................ 107 Clearing configurations ......................................... 110 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ...113 Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 113 Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 114 ADVANCED SETUP ..........................................117 Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................. 117 Setting remote control ID ...................................... 119 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................122 RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................130 GLOSSARY.........................................................131 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION .............................................134 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION .............................................135 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................136 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) • SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM • LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES 1 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 38 Connecting the XM Passport System ...................... 61 XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 62 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 63 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 65 Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 70 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 71 ADVANCED OPERATION AUTO SETUP....................................................... 32 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ...................61 BASIC OPERATION Placing speakers....................................................... 13 Connecting speakers ................................................ 14 Using bi-amplification connections......................... 17 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 18 Information on HDMI.............................................. 19 Audio and video signal flow.................................... 20 Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 21 Connecting other components ................................. 22 Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder ......................................... 26 Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 27 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 27 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 28 Connecting the power cable..................................... 29 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 30 Turning on and off the power .................................. 31 FM/AM controls and functions ............................... 54 Automatic tuning ..................................................... 55 Manual tuning.......................................................... 56 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 57 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 58 Selecting preset stations........................................... 59 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 60 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................... 8 Preparing the remote control ..................................... 9 Front panel display .................................................. 10 Rear panel ................................................................ 12 FM/AM TUNING..................................................54 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier iPod controlling capability ◆ Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 130 W + 130 W Center: 130 W Surround: 130 W + 130 W Surround back: 130 W + 130 W ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Passport System” sold separately) ◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience Other features ◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multichannel input ◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and macro capability ◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS ◆ Sleep timer HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.2a ◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI digital video) capability for monitor out Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved. iPod® “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. 2 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control (except Europe model) POWER XM TUNER SELECT 1 DTV AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH CD CD-R 2 3 STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE PHONO 5 4 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 7 6 ENT DVD V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 8 TV SET MENU TITLE PURE DIRECT Batteries (6) (AAA, R03, UM-4) VOLUME PRESET MENU SRCH MODE BAND A/B/C/D/E AUDIO ENTER MUTE A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT A-E/CAT. DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 4 SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 0 9 DISPLAY MOVIE 1 STEREO 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT PRESET/CH ALL PRESET ID1 ID2 CAT. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 NUMBER REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME Speaker terminal wrench Power cable Optimizer microphone Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia, General, and Korea models) Indoor FM antenna (Europe, U.K. and Australia models) AM loop antenna About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. 3 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about other control and functions. • AM/FM tuning ........................... see page 54 • XM satellite radio tuning ........... see page 62 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER C D E 1 MASTER ON/OFF Turns this unit on or off (see page 31). 2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode (see page 31). Notes • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. • This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 3 INPUT selector Selects the desired input source (see page 38). 4 En F G (U.S.A. model) 4 AUDIO SELECT Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and “ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or more input jacks (see page 40). 5 TONE CONTROL Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left, front right and center channels in conjunction with the PROGRAM selector (see page 50). 6 STRAIGHT Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 49). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 7 MULTI ZONE buttons ZONE 3 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode. See page 114 for details. Note D OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied optimizer microphone in the “AUTO SETUP” procedure (see page 32). These buttons are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. E PHONES jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones (see page 41). ZONE CONTROLS Switches the zone you want to control between the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. See page 114 for details. F VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console or a video camera (see page 27). y After you press ZONE CONTROLS, the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation. 8 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 10). 9 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 52). y To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. G VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. y This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. 0 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control (see page 9). ■ Opening and closing the front panel door A NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 53). When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. B PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the Pure Direct mode (see page 50). To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. 5 En INTRODUCTION ZONE 2 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode. See page 114 for details. C PROGRAM selector • Selects sound field programs (see page 44). • Adjusts the bass/treble balance in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see page 50). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control ■ Remote control controls and functions This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about other control and functions. • AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 54 • XM satellite radio tuning ........................ see page 62 • Controlling a TV ................................... see page 101 • Controlling other components ............... see page 102 • Controlling option components ............. see page 103 1 2 Note B POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO 3 TUNER STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD C D E F V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 4 SELECT + + SOURCE TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE 5 TV INPUT G SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 6 PURE DIRECT 7 PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY 8 9 H The selected input source name appears in the display window on the remote control showing which source is currently operational. I J 4 Display window Shows the name of the selected input source that you can control. K L 5 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the output level (see page 51). AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT M N MOVIE O P Q R REC DISC SKIP 0 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR S t U A (U.S.A. model) 6 En RENAME 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source you want to control. y TV MUTE PRESET/CH LEVEL 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate (see page 9). 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. AMP + The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the operation mode selector position. Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit. 6 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or the “SET MENU” parameters. 7 RETURN Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters. 8 Sound field program selector buttons Select sound field programs (see page 44). 9 SUR. DECODE Activates decoders to play back 2-channel sources in surround (see page 80). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS I VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. A MACRO Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a single button (see page 107). J MUTE Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 41). B STANDBY Sets the main zone to the standby mode (see page 31). K PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the pure direct mode (see page 50). Note L SET MENU Enters “SET MENU” (see page 86). This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. C POWER Turns on the main zone (see page 31). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. D AUDIO SEL Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and “ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or more input jacks (see page 40). E SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 43). F MULTI CH IN Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external decoder, etc. (see page 41). G SELECT k / n Selects another input source that you can control independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons. H Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area. AMP Operates the amplifier function of this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 102). M PARAMETER Displays sound field parameter settings in the on-screen display (OSD) (see page 76). N STRAIGHT Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 49). O EXTD SUR. Switches between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources (see page 80). P SELECT Selects decoders for 2-channel sources (see pages 80 and 82). Q ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 52). R NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 53). S RENAME Changes the name of the input source in the display window (see page 106). T CLEAR Clears remote control functions acquired from the learn, macro and/or rename features (see page 110). U LEARN Programs remote control codes of functions from other remote controls (see page 105). TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 101). Notes • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 103. • When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and PHONO (see page 103), priority is given to the one set for DTV/CBL. 7 En INTRODUCTION 0 MACRO ON/OFF Turns on or off the macro function (see page 107). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control This section describes the function of each control on the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control the amplifier functions of Zone 2 or Zone 3. See the following pages for details about other controls and functions. 1 Input selector buttons Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3. • AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 54 • XM Satellite Radio tuning ...................... see page 62 3 POWER Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3. Note Note Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control is supplied with U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K., China, Asia and General models only. This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 4 STANDBY Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode. POWER XM 3 TUNER CD CD-R 1 2 3 DTV 1 5 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 7 4 6 ENT DVD V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 8 A/B/C/D/E 6 MUTE A-E/CAT. DISPLAY PRESET/CH ALL PRESET ID1 ID2 2 CAT. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 NUMBER (U.S.A. model) 8 En This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 5 VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3. 5 VOLUME PRESET Note STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE PHONO 4 2 ID1/ID2 switch Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2 (see page 104). 7 6 MUTE Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. 7 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that of Zone 3. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Preparing the remote control 2 1 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. ■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control (Except Europe model) Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. ■ Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. Remote control sensor 1 3 2 Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. 30 30 Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places 9 En INTRODUCTION ■ Installing batteries in the remote control 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display Note The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when “XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 65. 1 2 3 V-AUX DOCK 4 DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE 5 CD-R CD PHONO 6 MULTI CH TUNER XM neural VIRTUAL HiFi DSP YPAO ENHANCER SILENT DSD PCM 0 A B C D E F DIGITAL PL x EX dB VOLUME MUTE 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE 96 24 7 neural DSD PCM VIRTUAL HiFi DSP YPAO ENHANCER SILENT CINEMA DIGITAL PL x EX MATRIX DISCRETE G 96 24 8 H I 9 L M N O P J K TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY PS ZONE2 PTY ZONE3 RT NIGHT CT SLEEP EON PTY HOLD TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY PS ZONE2 PTY ZONE3 RT NIGHT CT SLEEP EON PTY HOLD 0 ........ U.S.A. and Canada models only P ........ U.K. and Europe models only 1 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 19). 8 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. 9 Input channel and speaker indicators 2 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 27). Presence speaker indicators L C R LFE SL SB SR Presence and surround back speaker indicators Light up according to the number of presence and surround back speakers set for “PRESENCE SP” (see page 89) and “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) in “SOUND MENU” when “TEST” in “SOUND MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 92). 4 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 5 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. 7 Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 10 En Surround back speaker indicators Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. 3 Battery charge indicator Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit. (see page 73). 6 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 41). Input channel indicators y You can make settings for the presence and surround back speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for “PRESENCE SP” (see page 89) and “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) in “SOUND MENU”. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS A DSP indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP sound field programs are selected. CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 45). HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 45). B VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 49). C YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without any modifications (see page 32). D DSD indicator Lights up when this unit is producing DSD (Direct Stream Digital) digital audio signals. E ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (see page 52). F PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. G Dolby decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the Dolby decoders of this unit function. H Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Surround left DSP sound field Surround right DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field I Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 41). J SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 49). K DTS decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the DTS decoders of this unit function. L Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite Radio tuning mode. TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station (see page 54). STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit (see page 54). AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode (see page 54). MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 57). M ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on (see page 114). N NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 53). O SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 43). P Radio Data System indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) PS, PTY, RT and CT Light up according to the selected Radio Data System display mode. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 11 En INTRODUCTION 0 neural indicator (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Lights up when the Neural Surround decoder is activated (see page 81). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 1 2 MONITOR OUT 3 4 COMPONENT VIDEO A DVD B DTV C CBL/SAT Y 5 VIDEO DVD CBL/SAT DTV IN 6 7 8 ANTENNA VCR 1 OUT IN DVR/VCR 2 OUT MONITOR OUT FM Y GND AC IN AM S VIDEO PB PB PR PR IN (PLAY) IN REMOTE VIDEO OUT (REC) R MD/ + SP1 PRESENCE + SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SPEAKERS + L WRENCH HOLDER L TAPE OUT R HDMI GND PHONO IN 2 L CBL/ SAT R CD CD-R CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 SINGLE CENTER + + AC OUTLETS R IN(PLAY) IN 1 OUT(REC) AUDIO XM DOCK SUB WOOFER SURROUND + L R PRESENCE WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT + SUR.BACK/ SUB SB(8CH) SP2 L ZONE OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT PRE OUT + DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL OUT 1 CD 2 DVD DVR/ 3 VCR2 4 CD 5 DVD 6 DTV 7 CBL/ SAT 8 MD/ TAPE R + + FRONT L 9 CD-R 2 1 CONTROL OUT RS-232C (U.S.A. model) 9 0 A B C D CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) MULTI CH INPUT F E CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 SUR.BACK/ SUB PRESENCE WOOFER PRE OUT ZONE OUT G H 1 REMOTE jacks See page 113 for details. 0 DOCK terminal See page 27 for connection information. 2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See pages 21 and 22 for connection information. A XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) See page 61 for connection information. 3 Audio component jacks See page 24 for connection information. B DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks See page 22 for connection information. 4 Video component jacks See pages 21 and 22 for connection information. C CONTROL OUT jack This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. 5 ANTENNA terminals See page 28 for connection information. 6 WRENCH HOLDER Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when not in use (see page 15). 7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) See page 29 for details. D RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult your dealer for details. E Speaker terminals See page 14 for connection information. F MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 26 for connection information. 8 AC IN/OUTLET(S) See page 29 for connection information. G PRE OUT jacks See page 25 for connection information. 9 HDMI connectors See page 19 for connection information. H ZONE OUT jacks See page 113 for connection information. 12 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. PL PR C Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Place the center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 30˚ SL SR 60˚ 80˚ SL SR SBL Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. SBR 30 cm (12 in) or more Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as that of the front speakers. PR FR PL SW FL SR SBR C SBL SL 1.8 m (6 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL PR FR FL C 1.8 m (6 ft) Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 134). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inward, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. 13 En PREPARATION FR FL Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 31). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 30). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 118). Notes • A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. • The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89) are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87). • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PRIORITY” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 89). • You can use the PRESENCE terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 113). Subwoofer Surround back speakers Left Right Presence speakers Left Right Center speaker R R + SP1 PRESENCE + SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + SPEAKERS + SINGLE SURROUND L CENTER + + + L SUB R WOOFER SP2 L PRE OUT R + FRONT + L (U.S.A. model) Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers (see page 113) Left Right Surround speakers Left Right Front speakers 14 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS FRONT terminals Connect front left and right speakers to these terminals. ■ Connecting the speaker cable CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker to these terminals. 1 SURROUND terminals Connect surround left and right speakers to these terminals. SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back left and right speakers to these terminals. Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (0.4 in) When you use a surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE). 2 PRESENCE terminals Connect presence left and right speakers to these terminals. Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. Speaker terminal wrench SUBWOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System) to this jack. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. 4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. 15 En PREPARATION Note 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS 5 Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto the WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this unit when not in use. ■ Connecting the banana plug (except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea models) The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. Banana plug ■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker terminals 1 Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see page 113). 1 Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. Speaker terminal wrench Open the tab. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 2 Insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Insert one bare wire into the hole on the terminal. y 3 Close the tab to secure the wire. 16 En You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals. Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Using bi-amplification connections ■ Bi-amplification connection To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 119). This unit + SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + FRONT SINGLE PREPARATION Some of the speakers have speaker wire connections that allow bi-amplification to enhance the performance of the speaker system. This unit allows you to make biamplification connection to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-amplification. As these speakers are shipped to you, you will note shorting bars or bridges, one connecting the two red input terminals and the other connecting the two black input terminals. Remove these shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to bi-amplify your speakers. + ■ Conventional connection If you want to connect your speakers as traditional loudspeakers using the conventional connection method, connect your speakers using the regular left and right speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of terminals. R + L This unit R + + FRONT L Right Left Front speakers Note Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. Right Left Front speakers Shorting bars or bridges Shorting bars or bridges 17 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL DIGITAL L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right Coaxial analog audio digital audio cable plugs cable plug Video jacks and cable plugs VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Note You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. 18 En S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y This unit equips the video connection function. See pages 20 and 97 for details. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Information on HDMI This unit has the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI OUT jacks for digital audio and video signal input/output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a projector). The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of the selected input source are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Note You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 42). Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz,1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. PREPARATION ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit ■ HDMI jack and cable plug HDMI HDMI cable plug This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. y • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Notes • Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the connection to the component. • The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “V CONV.” to “ON” in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 98) to activate this feature. 19 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow Input ■ Video signal flow Input Output Output HDMI HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) S VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO Digital output Through Analog output Video conversion (see page 97) Notes • 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” (see page 93). • Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. Component interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 98) HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 98) Notes • When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: 1. COMPONENT VIDEO 2. S VIDEO 3. VIDEO • The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p. Set CMPNT I/P to ON in MANUAL SETUP to activate this feature (see page 98). • Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks. • The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 98) and HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 98) are available only when “V CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 97). • Use the “HDMI I/P” parameter in “OPTION MENU” to deinterlace the analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 98). When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the picture quality may worsen. • The OSD signal is not output at the VCR 1 OUT and DVR/VCR 2 OUT jacks and is not recorded. • The color of the letters and images in the OSD may differ depending on the input signals and your video monitor. 20 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting a TV monitor or projector Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. y Notes • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. • Set “V CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 97) to display the short message display and parameter displays. • Set “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 97) to display the parameter displays. • The SET MENU and parameter displays appear with the gray background depending on the input video signal format and the setting of the parameters in “DISPLAY SET” (see page 97). COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT Y S VIDEO PB VIDEO PR HDMI OUT (U.S.A. model) Y PB V PR Component video in S Video in S-video in HDMI in TV (or projector) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 21 En PREPARATION You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 93). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting other components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • When “V CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 97), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 21). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “V CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 97), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 94). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. • The parameter displays do not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p are input. • The parameter and short message displays do not appear when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack. ■ Connecting a DVD player DVD player Optical out HDMI out Coaxial out Audio out Component out S-video out C PR PB Y Video out S COMPONENT VIDEO A DVD R V VIDEO DVD Y PB PR L R HDMI IN 1 DIGITAL INPUT DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL 2 DVD 5 DVD (U.S.A. model) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 22 En L O 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR Note *1 When you connect another VCR to this unit, connect it to the VCR 1 terminals (S VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN, AUDIO IN, S VIDEO OUT, VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks) same as DVR/VCR 2 terminals except the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. *1 VIDEO VCR 1 IN OUT IN DVR/VCR 2 OUT S VIDEO VIDEO L R PREPARATION R IN DVR/VCR 2 OUT DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL R DVR/ 3 VCR2 L V S S-video in R Video in R Audio in L Audio out V Video out S S-video out C Coaxial out (U.S.A. model) DVD recorder, PVR or VCR ■ Connecting set-top boxes Satellite receiver, cable TV receiver HDTV decoder HDMI out Component out Optical out COMPONENT VIDEO B DTV C CBL/SAT S S V L R Audio out V Video out L S-video out R S-video out O Video out Y Audio out PB Optical out Component out PR O PR PB Y VIDEO DTV CBL/SAT Y S VIDEO PB VIDEO PR L R HDMI IN 2 CBL/ SAT DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL 6 DTV 7 CBL/ SAT (U.S.A. model) 23 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting audio components Notes • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 94). • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some turntables. • The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a lowoutput MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier. • When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component, the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. Audio out Optical in L O R Audio in CD recorder L R IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) MD/ L TAPE R GND PHONO CD CD-R L R IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL COAXIAL 1 CD 8 MD/ TAPE 4 CD 9 CD-R (U.S.A. model) R Ground Audio out L R L O C Audio out Coaxial out R Optical out L R Audio out O L Audio in Optical in Turntable 24 En CD player MD recorder or tape deck 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting an external amplifier This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Notes 1 2 CENTER FRONT 3 PREPARATION • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals. • The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 50). • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer (see page 51). • Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 87) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87). 4 SURROUND SINGLE(SB) L R SUR.BACK/ SUB PRESENCE WOOFER PRE OUT 5 1 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel output jack. 2 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. 3 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel output jacks. 4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack. y • Set the “SB L/R SP” to “LRGx2”, “LRGx1”, “SMLx2” or “SMLx1” and “PRESENCE SP” to “NONE” (see page 89) to output the surround back channel signals at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. • Set the “PRESENCE SP” to “YES” and “SB L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 89) to output the presence channel signals at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. 5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. 25 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. If you set “INPUT CH” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 96), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in MULTI CH SET (see page 96) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 41), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input ( CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND ) ( C) MD/ L TAPE L *1 R R CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) L MULTI CH INPUT L L R R R WOOFER Surround out SUB SB(8CH) MULTI CH INPUT R L R L R Front out Center out Subwoofer out Surround out L Surround back out Front out Center out Subwoofer out SUB Multi-format player/ External decoder Multi-format player/ External decoder Note *1 26 En The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 96). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Do not connect this unit to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. CAUTION Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT CATEGORY INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O DOCK YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) S-Video output Video output Audio output Optical output Game console or video camera 27 En PREPARATION CAUTION Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. 2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT terminal. 4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the other lead wire to the GND terminal. Notes • Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area (see page 119). • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. Indoor FM antenna (supplied) AM loop antenna (supplied) ANTENNA FM GND AM (U.S.A. model) Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8 ft) vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. y ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna. 28 En Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you tune into AM stations (see page 54). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable ■ Connecting the AC power cable CAUTION Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as doing so may result in fire or electrical shock. Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the AC power cable into an AC wall outlet. (U.S.A. model) PREPARATION AC IN To the AC wall outlet AC OUTLETS ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) CAUTION The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ......110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet Korea model ............................................................... None Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 136. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. Voltage indication 29 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Setting the speaker impedance CAUTION 4 If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers. Press STRAIGHT on the front panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT SPEAKER IMP. EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO 6 MIN OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER 2,5 1 3 5 2,4 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. Make sure this unit is turned off. See page 31 for details about turning on or off this unit. MASTER 2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT While holding down EFFECT 3 MASTER Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “SPEAKER IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM SPEAKER IMP. 8 MIN 30 En Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 31 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONNECTIONS Turning on and off the power When all connections are complete, turn on this unit. MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model) STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV PURE DIRECT XM STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN POWER VOLUME PHONO AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER TUNER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON PREPARATION OFF MASTER MASTER ON/OFF ■ Turning on this unit Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. When you turns on this unit by pressing MASTER ON/ OFF, the main zone is turned on. ■ Turning on the main zone from the standby mode Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) to turn on the main zone. MAIN ZONE POWER ON/OFF or MASTER Front panel ■ Turning off this unit Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Front panel Remote control ■ Set the main zone to the standby mode Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main zone to the standby mode. MAIN ZONE STANDBY MASTER ON/OFF or Front panel Notes Front panel Remote control • MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. • As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this unit. 31 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 32 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP This unit employs the YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Using AUTO SETUP 1 Once you have connected the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel and have placed it in a suitable location in your listening room, run “AUTO SETUP” in the OSD or in the front panel display. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT Notes DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. YPAO PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX Omni-directional microphone y • You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure and an error or warning message appears in the OSD or in the front panel display, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on pages 128 and 129 for a complete list of error and warning messages and proper remedies. • The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold. • If the volume level and the crossover frequency of your subwoofer can be adjusted, set the volume level to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH MENU SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER RETURN XM MEMORY STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) 32 En Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone 4 TV MUTE SET MENU TITLE BAND 2 4,14 3-13 y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use a 6 mm diameter screw to fix the optimizer microphone to a tripod (etc.). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP 3 SET MENU SET MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNALINFO ENTER A-E/CAT. This unit performs the following checks: Speaker wiring WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. p p Press ENTER to enter “AUTO SETUP”. The “AUTO:MENU” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH 1 AUTO:MENU A-E/CAT. p p .SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO WIRING;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK START []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Select p [ ENTER Speaker distance DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Speaker size SIZE Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 6 1 AUTO:MENU SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO .WIRING;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK START []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Select p [ MENU SRCH MODE TV 5 PRESET/CH Press l / h to select “SETUP”. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Choices: AUTO, RELOAD • Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and override the previous settings. When you select “RELOAD”, the previous auto setup result appears in the OSD. See step 7 on page 34 and carry out the operations. Note “RELOAD” is available only when you have previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results. Choices: CHECK, SKIP • Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust the item. • Select “SKIP” to skip the item and perform no adjustments. Parametric equalizer level EQ Adjusts the frequency and the parametric equalizer level of each channel to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. In addition, the frequency response of each channel is adjusted in accordance with the sound output from your front speakers. Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT, SKIP • Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little harsh. • Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. • Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. • Select “SKIP” to skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. 33 En PREPARATION AMP SOURCE Press k / n repeatedly to select “WIRING”, “DISTANCE”, “SIZE”, “EQ”, or “LEVEL”. p Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 7 p 4 Make sure of the following check points before starting the AUTO SETUP operations. • Speakers are connected appropriately. • Supplied optimizer microphone is connected to this unit and placed appropriately. • Headphones are disconnected from this unit. • The room is sufficiently quiet. • The video monitor connected to this unit is turned on. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP Volume level LEVEL Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. Choices: CHECK, SKIP • Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust this item. • Select “SKIP” to skip this item and perform no adjustments. 8 Press n to select “START” and then press ENTER to start the setup procedure. This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the “RESULT:EXIT” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Notes • During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure. The display changes as follows. 1 AUTO:MENU p p SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO WIRING;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK . START []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ 2 AUTO:CHECK p INITIALIZING .PRE CHECK MAIN CHECK EQUALIZING LEVEL CHECK CH=CENTER |||||;;;;;;;; []: Exit RESULT:EXIT 34 En p p . RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB [ SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows. Number of speakers SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Front/Back/Subwoofer Speaker distance DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Speaker level LVL Displays the speaker output level in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Notes • If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing procedure, restart from step 4. • If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure, the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 36. • When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning messages appears in the above of “RESULT” (see page 37). • Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 89) is automatically set to “REVERSE”. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 35 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP 9 Press ENTER to display the setup results in detail. 10 Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between the setup result displays. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK Results of the speaker connection and wiring []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return p p . RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB [ SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter RESULT:DISTANCE1 FRONT L;;14.0ft CENTER;;;17.0ft FRONT R;;15.0ft PRNS L;;;17.0ft PRNS R;;;17.0ft RESULT:WIRING Results of the speaker distance from the listening position []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return FRONT L;;;;;;;OK RESULT:SIZE FRONT L;;;;;;LRG []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return Results of the frequency response of each speaker []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return RESULT:EQ CENTER 1:100Hz;;;+2.5dB 2:300Hz;;;-0.5dB 3:1.5kHz;;+0.5dB 4:1.8kHz;;+2.5dB 5:1.8kHz;;-3.5dB 6:2.5kHz;;+2.5dB 7:10kHz;;;+2.5dB []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return RESULT:LEVEL1 FRONT L;;;+1.0dB CENTER;;;;-1.5dB FRONT R;;;+6.5dB PRNS L;;;;-9.0dB PRNS R;;;;+1.0dB Results of the parametric equalizer of each speaker Results of the speaker output level []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return y If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 84). Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate your system. • The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. 35 En PREPARATION RESULT:EXIT 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 36 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP 11 ■ If an error screen appears Press ENTER to return to the top “RESULT:EXIT” display. PRESET/CH RESULT:EXIT A-E/CAT. p 12 p . RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB [ SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ENTER Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET” and “CANCEL” and then press l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”. PRESET/CH RESULT:EXIT A-E/CAT. p p RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB .[ SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ENTER Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP” results. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP” results. 13 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH SET MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNALINFO ENTER 14 p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter A-E/CAT. Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE Notes • After you have completed the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. 36 En Press k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and then press ENTER. The following display is an example where “E-9:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. ERROR E-9:USER CANCEL . Don't operate any function. .[ RETRY EXIT [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Enter Choices: RETRY, EXIT • Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 37 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM AUTO SETUP ■ If “WARNING” appears When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the “RESULT:EXIT” display. Check the warning messages to correct your speaker settings. Note Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 PREPARATION Make sure the pointer is pointing at “WARNING” and then press ENTER to display the detailed information about the warning. The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. RESULT:EXIT 2 p p . WARNING (3) RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB [SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between the warning displays. WARNING: W-1 < OUT OF PHASE > Reverse Channel FL -CENTER PL PR SL SR SBL SBR p [ : Select []/[] [ENTER] : Enter y • For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 128. • When the corresponding warning message is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is displayed instead. 3 Press ENTER to return to the top “RESULT:EXIT” display. PRESET/CH RESULT:EXIT ENTER A-E/CAT. p p WARNING (3) RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 14.0/ 17.0ft . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB .[ SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 37 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 38 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK PLAYBACK CAUTION Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. y To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to “DTS” before the playback (see page 96). Basic procedure 2 (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER INPUT NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER 2 5 Front panel 4 or POWER POWER TV AV XM STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE PURE DIRECT XM MENU SRCH MODE BAND AMP PHONO TUNER CD PHONO AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD PARAMETER 2 SELECT V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT EFFECT XM MEMORY 5 SOURCE STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT TV DTV VCR 1 Remote control AMP + + + SOURCE TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TV 2 4 REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for a few seconds. (U.S.A. model) 1 Available input sources V-AUX Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD INPUT: MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM DVD y • See page 42 to display the input source information. • You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 97). • You can change the display settings by using “SHORT MESSAGE” parameter in “DISPLAY SET”. See pages 98 for details. 38 En Currently selected input source Note For details about controlling XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected as the input source, see page 65. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 39 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK 3 4 Note Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 54 for details about tuning instructions. • See page 65 for details about XM Satellite Radio tuning instructions. Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40). Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 76 for details. VOLUME ■ Guide to contents + or y VOLUME – When you want to... Front panel Remote control See page 51 to adjust the level of each speaker. 5 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. See page 45 for details about sound field programs. or CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 50 Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 50 Enjoy the compressed music sources in enhanced sound 52 Edit parameters of sound field programs 76 Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at night 53 Use headphones 41 Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 51 Select a decoder to play back sources with 80 Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 43 STEREO PROGRAM Front panel 5 Remote control Currently selected sound field program category MOVIE Sci-Fi Currently selected sound field program 39 En BASIC OPERATION y See page 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 40 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK AUTO Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (Audio input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source. y • We recommend setting Audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default Audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 99). 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. INPUT Note PHONO V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT or DTV Front panel 2 VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Remote control Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel (or AUDIO SEL on the remote control) repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack select setting. AUDIO SELECT AUDIO SEL or Available input sources V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD A.SEL: MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM AUTO Currently selected Audio input jack select setting 40 En This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not available as an Audio input jack select setting when the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 94). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 41 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 26) as the input source. Using your headphones Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. Rotate the input selector on the front panel to select MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 96). y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 49) Note Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40), only the signals input at FRONT jacks are output from the connected headphones. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. Muting the audio output Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output. MUTE y • You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 93). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. 41 En BASIC OPERATION y 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 42 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. AMP SET MENU MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNALINFO SRCH MODE TV p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 2 Signal format FORMAT Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals. Sampling frequency SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. SET MENU SOURCE ■ Audio information Press n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press ENTER. The audio information about the input source appears in the OSD. Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling frequency. Channel CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. Note “---” appears when there is no source channel available. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. Bit rate BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. Note A-E/CAT. “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate. 3 Press k / n repeatedly to navigate the cursor in the OSD and press l / h to toggle between the audio and video information displays. PRESET/CH Dialogue normalization level DIALOG The dialogue normalization level preset to the current input Dolby Digital and DTS signal. Flag FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. PRESET/CH ■ Video information ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Navigating the cursor 4 Selecting the audio or video information Press SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 42 En HDMI Signal Type HDMI SIGNAL Type of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. HDMI Resolution HDMI RES. Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. Analog Resolution ANALOG RES. Resolution of the analog signals input or output at the video jacks of this unit. HDMI Error HDMI ERROR Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. See page 127 for details. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 43 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PLAYBACK Playing video sources in the background of an audio source 3 You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. SLEEP 120min. SLEEP OFF SLEEP 90min. SLEEP 30min. SLEEP 60min. XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. Audio sources Video sources 120min. SLEEP y Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the desired setting to select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 96). Flashes Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 29). 1 Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the desired input source. STRAIGHT Analog SLEEP Lights up ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV 2 VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. See page 54 for details about tuning instructions. SLEEP OFF Disappears The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby mode. 43 En BASIC OPERATION SLEEP 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 44 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y • When you set the “DECODER MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” to “AUTO”, this unit selects the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. • The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. • The YAMAHA HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • You can change sound field parameters. See page 76 for details. Selecting sound field programs Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 40). • When you play back DSD sources with any sound field program, this unit converts the DSD signals to PCM signals and then applies the selected program. • When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the DTS 96/24 decoder. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied. ■ Front panel operations ■ Remote control operations (U.S.A. model) AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME AMP SOURCE PURE DIRECT – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TV VOLUME LEVEL AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO AUDIO ENTER OPTICAL A-E/CAT. PARAMETER PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX ON OFF STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY MASTER PROGRAM selector CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 9 0 MOVIE 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT Sound field program selector buttons (U.S.A. model) Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. 44 En Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 45 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program descriptions y Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. Remote control button Category of the program Name of the program Created sound fields (see page 11) CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP MOVIE 4 MOVIE Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DSP LEVEL P.INIT. DLY P.ROOM SIZE S.INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG. LIFT Program description Available sound field parameters (see page 77) ■ For music audio sources For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 50), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 49) or surround decode mode (see page 80). CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 CLASSICAL Hall in Munich HiFi DSP This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Hall in Amsterdam HiFi DSP This is a large 2200 seat shoe-box type concert hall in Amsterdam. It has a circular stage with seats located behind the stage. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Church in Freiburg HiFi DSP This program creates the acoustic environment of a big church located in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVENESS REV.TIME REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT 45 En BASIC OPERATION y 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 46 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL Chamber HiFi DSP This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 LIVENESS REV.TIME LIVE/CLUB REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT Village Vanguard HiFi DSP A traditional jazz club in New York, located on 7th Avenue. This room has a low ceiling, and the “stage” is located at the corner of the room. This program creates an intimate “close-to-the music” feel. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB DIALG.LIFT Warehouse Loft HiFi DSP This program simulates a space enclosed by concrete. An energetic sound field is created with relatively clear reflections from the walls. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB REV.TIME REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT Cellar Club HiFi DSP This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB DIALG.LIFT The Roxy Theatre HiFi DSP The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB REV.TIME REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT The Bottom Line HiFi DSP This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS DIALG.LIFT ■ For various sources Note The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY 46 En P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 47 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAINMENT Action Game This sound field has been optimized for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 3 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Roleplaying Game This sound field has been optimized for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT ■ For visual sources of music Note LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 ENTERTAINMENT Music Video HiFi DSP This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 3 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera” offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music, The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT ■ For movie sources y You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 82 for details. Note The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. MOVIE 4 MOVIE Standard This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. DSP LEVEL S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE S. LIVENESS SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE SB LIVENESS DIALG.LIFT 47 En BASIC OPERATION The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 48 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS MOVIE MOVIE 4 Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY MOVIE Sci-Fi MOVIE 4 SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE MOVIE 4 S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE MOVIE 4 S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE MOVIE 4 S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS REV.TIME REV. LEVEL REV.DELAY DIALG.LIFT ■ Stereo playback STEREO 5 STEREO 2ch STEREO Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 51 for details. DIRECT STEREO 5 STEREO 7ch STEREO HiFi DSP Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. CT LEVEL SL LEVEL 48 En SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 49 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Enjoying unprocessed input sources Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. When you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 88), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 45). When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Note Press STRAIGHT on the front panel (or on the remote control) to select “STRAIGHT”. Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 88) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the Pure Direct (see page 50) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 51) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 49). SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 45). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see page 50) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 51) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 49). STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT STRAIGHT Format Dolby Digital Description Standard processing for Dolby Digital sources. DTS Standard processing for DTS sources. When the input source is DTS ES Discrete or DTS ES Matrix format, the respective indicator appears in the front panel display. DSD Plays back DSD (Direct Stream Digital) sources. PCM Plays back PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) sources. Plays back multi-channel PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) sources. MPCM Analog Plays back analog sources. ■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode Press STRAIGHT on the remote control so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT 49 En BASIC OPERATION ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) STRAIGHT 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 50 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING AUDIO FEATURES USING AUDIO FEATURES Enjoying pure hi-fi sound Adjusting the tonal quality Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front L/R, center, presence L/R speaker channels and the subwoofer channel. 1 Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel (or on the remote control) to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode. The PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel display automatically dims. Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS) TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT or PURE DIRECT 2 Front panel Remote control Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Notes • When you play back the multi-channel PCM sources (less than 192 kHz), this unit downmixes the multi-channel signals according to the “SPEAKER SET” in “BASIC MENU” (see page 87). • When the component connected to the HDMI IN jacks is selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to “AUTO” or “HDMI”, this unit does not turn off the video circuitry in the Pure Direct mode. • When you set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”, “HDMI” or “COAX/OPT” (see page 40) and play back the Dolby Digital, DTS or multi channel PCM sources, this unit activates the corresponding decoder. • The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for speaker level settings) – operating video functions (video conversion, etc.) • The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is turned off. y The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed. 50 En PROGRAM ■ Bypassing the tone control circuitry Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS and cancel the tone control. TONE CONTROL Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R, center, presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 51 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING AUDIO FEATURES Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 90). 1 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. 1 Set the operation mode to AMP and then press STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. AMP STEREO SOURCE 5 TV AMP LEVEL SOURCE TITLE BAND TV Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker CENTER Center speaker FRONT R Front right speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back right speaker SB R Surround back left speaker SUR. L Surround left speaker SWFR Subwoofer PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker y • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 87). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. 2 Press PARAMETER and then l / h to set the “DIRECT” parameter. PRESET/CH PARAMETER y • Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing k / n. • Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 89). 2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. DISPLAY ENTER A-E/CAT. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 50). • Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB. y • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: –“LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 87). –“FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 88) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 87). • Press PARAMETER again to exit from the parameter setting mode. 51 En BASIC OPERATION Display 2ch Stereo 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 52 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING AUDIO FEATURES Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is resampled to lower the bit rate and to remove sounds that are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. Notes • When you play back DSD sources or PCM sources whose sampling frequencies are higher than 48 kHz, this unit samples them down to 48 kHz or lower and applies the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with any of the sound field programs. Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 7ch Enhancer, Off • Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. • Select “7ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. • Select “Off” to turn off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. Note When you select “Off”, this unit returns to the previously selected sound field program. ■ Changing the parameter of the Compressed Music Enhancer mode Press PARAMETER and then l / h on the remote control to select the desired effect level. The following display is shown in the OSD. PRESET/CH PARAMETER DISPLAY ENTER A-E/CAT. Press ENHANCER on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press ENHANCER on the remote control) repeatedly to select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer mode. The following display is shown in the OSD and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display. MUSIC ENHANCER 2ch Stereo . LOW [HIGH AMP ENHANCER or SOURCE ENHANCER ENT TV Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. y Press PARAMETER to turn off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter display. ENHANCER MUSICENHANCER 2chEnhancer 52 En Lights up Note Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 53 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING AUDIO FEATURES Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on the type of material you are playing. 1 Press NIGHT on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press NIGHT on the remote control) repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: –when the Pure Direct mode (see page 50) is selected. –when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 41). –when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. AMP NIGHT SOURCE or NIGHT + 10 TV BASIC OPERATION Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. 53 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 54 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. FM/AM controls and functions ■ Front panel functions 1 2 AUDIO SELECT ■ Remote control functions 3 45 6 7 TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM PHONO 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD VCR 1 1 EDIT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES CD-R 2 3 STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE PHONO 5 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO 7 OPTICAL 6 ENT DVD V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 VIDEO AUX 1 INPUT selector Selects “TUNER” as the input source. + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME 2 3 – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT • Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h between selecting preset station numbers and selecting the tuning frequency. • Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 58). 5 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see page 55). 6 MEMORY Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 57). 7 TUNING MODE Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 55). 3 5 VOLUME PRESET A/B/C/D/E MUTE A-E/CAT. DISPLAY PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY 5 EFFECT XM MEMORY 3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h • Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 57). • Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 56). Set to SOURCE PURE DIRECT A-E/CAT. RETURN 4 TV AUDIO ENTER CLASSICAL 2 A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) (see page 57). 8 AMP (U.S.A. model) 54 En CD SELECT ZONE 2 SOURCE PROGRAM 1 4 ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO TUNER DTV DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT POWER XM DTV TUNING MODE TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT PRESET ID1 ID2 CAT. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 NUMBER MOVIE STEREO PRESET/CH ALL (U.S.A. model) 1 TUNER Selects “TUNER” as the input source. This unit is turned into the last selected station. 2 BAND Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see page 55). This unit is turned into the last selected AM or FM station. 3 PRESET/CH k / n Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (on page 58). 4 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations (see page 59). 5 A-E/CAT. l / h, A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see page 57). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 55 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Automatic tuning 3 Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE DISPLAY (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL AFM88.9MHz VIDEO AUX AUTO ON OFF MASTER 1 1 No colon (:) 4 32 3 Lights up If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. EDIT SEARCH MODE 4 Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press l to tune into a lower frequency. FM/AM FM or AM PRESET/TUNING/CH AFM88.9MHz TUNED Lights up 55 En BASIC OPERATION PRESET/ TUNING INPUT 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 56 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Manual tuning 3 If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. TUNING MODE Note DISPLAY Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. (U.S.A. model) AFM88.9MHz PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS No colon (:) MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. MASTER 1 4 32 3 PRESET/ TUNING EDIT 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. SEARCH MODE 4 INPUT Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. PRESET/TUNING/CH Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM 56 En or AM 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 57 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Automatic preset tuning 3 You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. MEMORY (U.S.A. model) MAN'L/AUTO FM PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL A1:FM88.9MHz VIDEO AUX AUTO MEMORY ON OFF MASTER 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. Front panel Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y INPUT 2 Flashes FM • You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations. Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/ TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3 to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. • You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store FM stations automatically. Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l after pressing and holding MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 58. 57 En BASIC OPERATION 1 Flashes 2 3 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 58 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Manual preset tuning 4 You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press h to select a higher preset station number. • Press l to select a lower preset station number. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/TUNING/CH PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER A1:FM88.9MHz 3 4 2,5 Preset station number 1 2 MEMORY Tune into a station automatically or manually. See pages 55 and 56 for tuning instructions. Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. 5 Flashes Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A1:FM88.9MHz The displayed station has been stored as A1. A/B/C/D/E CATEGORY A :FM88.9MHz Preset station Colon (:) group 58 En Notes MEMORY Flashes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 59 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Selecting preset stations 2 You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. (U.S.A. model) Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING TUNING MODE MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO PRESET/TUNING/CH OPTICAL or VIDEO AUX PHONES ENTER ON OFF MASTER A-E/CAT. 1 2 Front panel Remote control AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 1,2 PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 1 BASIC OPERATION LEVEL TV PURE DIRECT A1:FM88.9MHz AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER RETURN STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT XM MEMORY (U.S.A. model) y When performing this operation with the remote control, set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A/B/C/D/E CATEGORY Front panel or PRESET/CH AMP SOURCE TV ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control 59 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 60 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM FM/AM TUNING Exchanging preset stations 3 You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 59. (U.S.A. model) A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PURE DIRECT CATEGORY VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER A5:FM88.9MHz MEMORY 3 3 2,4 1 2 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 59. Press and hold EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes 4 Flashes Press EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. PRESET/ TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/ TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE EDIT E1:FM88.9MHz Flashes 60 En MEMORY Flashes E1-A5 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 61 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio is a satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States and Canada, broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes over 160 digital channels of choice from coast to coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide. Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on page 63. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. Notes Connecting the XM Passport System Connect XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with XM Passport System. XM (U.S.A. model) ■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc. XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock required to receive XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling “1800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” (for residents in the United States) or “1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)” (for residents in Canada). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at “http:// www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). XM service only available in the 48 continuous United States and Canada. “XM Ready” is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. © 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold separately) 61 En BASIC OPERATION • The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada. • XM Passport System and monthly subscription are sold separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). • For information on obtaining the XM Passport System, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada), or consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products. • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Passport System must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 62 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio controls and functions Note The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. ■ Front panel functions 1 ■ Remote control functions 2 AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E 3 4 PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING 56 MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM POWER POWER TV AV XM 1 POWER SLEEP 1 PHONO TUNER CD 1 MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD 4 INPUT DTV CD CD-R 2 3 ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT DTV DISPLAY SEARCH MODE VCR 1 STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE PHONO 5 4 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 EDIT CATEGORY POWER XM TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT TUNING MODE STANDBY AUDIO SEL 7 6 ENT DVD V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 8 9 ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO SELECT OPTICAL VIDEO AUX A/B/C/D/E + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE (U.S.A. model) LEVEL 1 INPUT selector Selects “XM” as the input source. 2 CATEGORY (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category while staying in the All Channel Search mode. (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel group (A to E). 3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (All Channel Search mode) Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8). 4 SEARCH MODE Changes the search mode between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 66). 5 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 70). 6 DISPLAY Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 71). 62 En VOLUME PRESET AMP PHONES 2 3 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL 4 PRESET/CH TV LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT 5 6 7 8 7 2 0 A MUTE A-E/CAT. DISPLAY PRESET/CH ALL PRESET ID1 ID2 CAT. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 NUMBER 8 B C 9 REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) 1 XM Selects “XM” as the input source. 2 PRESET/CH k / n (All Channel Search mode) Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8). 3 XM MEMORY Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 70). 4 Numeric buttons (All Channel Search or Category Search mode) Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly. (Preset Search mode) Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly. 5 Operation mode selector Set to SOURCE when you operate the XM Satellite Radio tuning function. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 63 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 6 SRCH MODE Changes the search mode between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 66). 7 A-E/CAT. l / h (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel group (A to E). 8 DISPLAY Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 71). Activating XM Satellite Radio To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required. Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and then visit the website or call toll-free with a major credit card handy for signing up. For residents in the United States URL: http://activate.xmradio.com/ Toll-free: 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346) For residents in Canada URL: https://activate.xmradio.ca/on-line-activation/ activation.jsp Toll-free: 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677) BASIC OPERATION 9 ENT Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct Number Access mode (see page 69). 0 ALL Selects the All Channel Search mode (see page 66). A NUMBER Press and hold before you press the input selector or numeric buttons to switch the function to entering numbers. B PRESET Selects the Preset Search Mode (see page 68). C CAT. Selects the Category Search mode (see page 67). 63 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 64 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING (U.S.A. model) 2 PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level and adjust the orientation of XM Passport System for a better percentage of the reception level. EDIT CATEGORY INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS y MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by using the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 100). VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER 1 3 Notes • If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, XM Passport System may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See “Connecting the XM Passport System” on page 61 and check the connection. • The “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 100) cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception level. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME 1 SOURCE 1 POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE PRESET/CH LEVEL 3 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE TV PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY (U.S.A. model) 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display. 3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select channel “0”. PRESET/CH PRESET/TUNING/CH or INPUT ENTER A-E/CAT. Front panel Note Front panel You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search mode (see page 66) is not selected. or AMP 4 XM SOURCE TV Remote control 64 En DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display and write it down. ID:_____________________________________ Lights up V-AUX Remote control CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 65 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Basic XM Satellite Radio operations 1 (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL INPUT VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER INPUT selector XM button POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT POWER SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Front panel or AMP XM SOURCE DTV VCR 1 TV SELECT Remote control AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV Set to SOURCE Lights up (U.S.A. model) V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM [001] Preview y When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Note The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. 2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on page 66. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on page 67. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” on page 68. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 69. y • You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the surround sound content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 80). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 70). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 71). 65 En BASIC OPERATION STANDBY AUDIO SEL 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 66 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ All Channel Search mode 2 (U.S.A. model) Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to change the channel category. PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS A/B/C/D/E MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO or OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ENTER CATEGORY ON OFF A-E/CAT. MASTER 2 Front panel 3 1 3 TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH TITLE MUTE SET MENU PURE DIRECT MENU SRCH MODE BAND AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER RETURN XM MEMORY 1 STRAIGHT 2,3 DISPLAY Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. EFFECT PRESET/CH (U.S.A. model) 1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. or or SEARCH MODE Remote control SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE Front panel ENTER A-E/CAT. Front panel PRESET/ TUNING EDIT Remote control ALL CH SEARCH 66 En PRESET/TUNING/CH y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 67 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Category Search mode (U.S.A. model) 2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to change the channel category. PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS A/B/C/D/E MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO or OPTICAL ENTER VIDEO AUX PHONES CATEGORY ON OFF MASTER A-E/CAT. 2 Front panel 3 1 3 PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT 1 2,3 DISPLAY RETURN XM MEMORY EFFECT Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/CH Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. PRESET/ TUNING EDIT SET MENU or PRESET/TUNING/CH or ENTER A-E/CAT. Front panel Remote control MENU SEARCH MODE Front panel BASIC OPERATION 1 SRCH MODE Remote control y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control). CAT SEARCH 67 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 68 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 70. 2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). y PRESET/CH The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is “[001] Preview”. A/B/C/D/E or (U.S.A. model) ENTER CATEGORY A-E/CAT. PURE DIRECT Front panel VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER Remote control NIGHT EDIT INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO 3 OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER 2 3 1 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). PRESET/CH LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT A-E/CAT. PARAMETER RETURN XM MEMORY PRESET/TUNING/CH or AUDIO ENTER 1 STRAIGHT 2,3 ENTER A-E/CAT. DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) Front panel 1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. PRESET/ TUNING SET MENU EDIT or SEARCH MODE MENU SRCH MODE Front panel Remote control PRESET SEARCH 68 En Remote control y You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 69 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Direct Number Access mode LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU PURE DIRECT MENU 1 SRCH MODE BAND AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT MOVIE 2 Press the numeric buttons on the remote control to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons as shown below. 2 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 (U.S.A. model) 1 The display changes as follows. Press SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. <XM> --1 SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE Remote control BASIC OPERATION <XM> -12 ALL CH SEARCH or <XM>123 CAT SEARCH y • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the numeric buttons on the remote control and then press ENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure. 69 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 70 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels 2 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 68. Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM MEMORY on the remote control). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or Front panel RETURN XM MEMORY Remote control (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT MEMORY VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT Flashes DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON Note OFF MASTER 3 4 TV MUTE LEVEL 3,4 2,5 TV INPUT PRESET/CH 2,5 MUTE SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER RETURN XM MEMORY STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) 1 You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 65 for details. 3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset channel group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel group letter appears in the front panel display. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E or CATEGORY ENTER A-E/CAT. [043] XMU Front panel Remote control Currently selected channel number C [043] XMU Currently selected preset channel group 70 En MEMORY Flashes 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 71 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/CH PURE DIRECT PRESET/TUNING/CH or ENTER VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A-E/CAT. A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF Front panel Remote control MASTER DISPLAY C5 [043] XMU MEMORY PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER Flashes Currently selected preset channel number RETURN XM MEMORY BASIC OPERATION LEVEL STRAIGHT DISPLAY DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) 5 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM MEMORY on the remote control) to set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or Front panel RETURN XM MEMORY Remote control Note If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 122 for appropriate remedies. ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. TUNING MODE Channel number / name DISPLAY C5: [043] XMU Front panel or Channel category PARAMETER Colon (:) DISPLAY Artist name / Song title Note Remote control Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is cleared. 71 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 72 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING When the channel number / name is displayed: [043] XMU ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD Press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following screen is displayed in the OSD. TUNING MODE When the channel category is displayed: PARAMETER or DISPLAY DISPLAY Front panel Remote control <CAT>Rock XM INFORMATION When the artist name / song title is displayed: Coldplay / Spe p y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98). • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. Note If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as described above. 72 En p ALL CH SEARCH XM :043 CHAN :XMU CAT :Rock NAME :Coldplay TITLE :Speed of sound .( Coldplay / Spe ) []/[]:CHANNEL [p]/[[]:CATEGORY y • To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY on the front panel (or on the remote control). • You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio information is displayed in the OSD by using the “ON SCREEN” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98). • To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD. • The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you change the XM Satellite Radio channel. • This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio information screen is being hold. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 73 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING IPOD USING iPod Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 27), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 52). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y Controlling iPod You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. y • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98). You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. Notes • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your iPod to select the desired photos or video clips. 73 En BASIC OPERATION • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 102. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 128. • Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. • Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHRG” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (on page 100). • While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 10) appears in the front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 74 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING iPod 1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. AMP PARAMETER SOURCE DISPLAY TV Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order. Note iPod Top Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings 2 When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. > > > > > > > Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to navigate the iPod menu and then press ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Note When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. 1 ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat 74 En All 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 75 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. CAUTION The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. (U.S.A. model) 2 PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the source component you want to record from. NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL INPUT VIDEO AUX PHONES ON OFF MASTER PHONO or 2 DTV POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO 2 TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Front panel Turn on all the connected components. VCR 1 CD MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Remote control 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. (U.S.A. model) 1 TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT 75 En BASIC OPERATION • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 50), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 90) and the sound field programs (see page 45) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • The XM Satellite Radio signals (U.S.A. and Canada models only) cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 76 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Changing sound field parameter settings 3 You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. Press one of the sound field program selector buttons repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO 5 Note You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 98). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 4 AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE TV INPUT 4 SET MENU PURE DIRECT TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN 2,5 PRESET/CH PRESET/CH EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL 3 2 MUTE PRESET/CH LEVEL TV Press k / n to select the desired sound field parameter and then l / h to change the selected sound field parameter value. • Press h to increase the value. • Press l to decrease the value. LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. (U.S.A. model) 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press PARAMETER on the remote control. The following display is shown in the OSD. AMP PARAMETER SOURCE DISPLAY TV Sound field program category MOVIE y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 77. • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field program parameter settings. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press k / n to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold l / h to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. • Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 99). • To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program, press n repeatedly to select “PARAM. INIT” and then press h repeatedly. Sci-fi Cursor . < P R O L O G I C > DSPLEVEL;;;+0dB P.INIT.DLY;;16ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;16ms 5 Press PARAMETER to turn off the sound field parameter display. PARAMETER DISPLAY Sound field parameters 76 En Sound field parameter values 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 77 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS ■ Sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. y To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 76 for details. Sound field parameter DSP LEVEL Features DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INI.DLY Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay Sound source ADVANCED OPERATION Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms 77 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 78 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 78 En Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 79 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s REV.DELAY 60 dB Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. ADVANCED OPERATION Level Control range: 0 to 250 ms Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control range: 0 to 100% Level REV.LEVEL REV.TIME Source sound REV. LEVEL Time 79 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 80 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Sound field parameter DIALG.LIFT Features Dialog lift. Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2ch Stereo DIRECT 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 50). • Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 87). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 88) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 87). 7ch Stereo CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL 7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% Selecting decoders 2 ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SUR. DECODE on the remote control to select the surround decode mode. AMP SOURCE TV 80 En SUR. DECODE 6 Press SELECT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired decoder. You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. SELECT 7 y • You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control. • You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press PARAMETER and then k / n repeatedly on the remote control to select the desired decoder parameter. You can change the value of the selected parameter by pressing l / h repeatedly on the remote control. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 81 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS ■ Decoder descriptions Remote control button Category of the program SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE Name of the program PLIIxMusic PLIIMusic Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89). PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH Program description Available sound field parameters (see page 77) SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Movie PL II Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89). SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Music PL II Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” PANORAMA SUR.DECODE 6 DIMENSION SURROUND DECODE ADVANCED OPERATION is set to “NONE” (see page 89). CENTER WIDTH PLIIx Game PL II Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89). SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE Neo: 6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources. SUR.DECODE 6 SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources. C. IMAGE SUR.DECODE 6 neural sur. SURROUND DECODE (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Neural Surround processing for any sources. The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) and analog 2channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surroundincompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio. y When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program. 81 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 82 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Decoder parameter descriptions Decoder parameter Features PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music PANORAMA Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music DIMENSION Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Choices: OFF, ON Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music CENTER WIDTH Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 DTS Neo:6 Music C.IMAGE DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 ■ Selecting decoders used with sound field programs Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”). See page 47 for details about MOVIE sound field program. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press MOVIE on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired MOVIE sound field programs. AMP MOVIE SOURCE 4 TV 2 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the desired decoder used with the selected sound field program. You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. y You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control. 82 En Available decoders Decoder PRO LOGIC PLIIx Movie PLII Movie Neo:6 Cinema Functions Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89). DTS processing for movie sources 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 83 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS ■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel sources If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1channel playback. AMP EXTD SUR. SOURCE 8 TV 2 Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder while the name of the decoder is displayed. PRESET/CH ENTER Decoders You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the source you are playing. Decoder Functions PLIIxMovie q D+PLIIx Movie DTS+PLIIx Movie MPCM+PLIIx Movie DSD+PLIIx Movie Plays back multi-channel sources in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic q D+PLIIx Music DTS+PLIIx Music MPCM+PLIIx Music DSD+PLIIx Music Plays back multi-channel sources in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. DTS ES DTS 96/24 ES Plays back DTS signals in 6.1/ 7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. DOLBY D EX DTS+DOLBY EX MPCM+DOLBY EX DSD+DOLBY EX Plays back multi-channel sources in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. A-E/CAT. Notes • “PLIIx Movie” is available only when “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) is set to “SMLx2” or “LRGx2”. • Some 6.1/7.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing these kinds of discs in 6.1/7.1 channels, select a decoder manually from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD SUR. in the following cases: – when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88) or “SB L/R SP” (see page 89) is set to “NONE”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 51) or Pure Direct (see page 50) mode is selected. • When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “AUTO”. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 89). 83 En ADVANCED OPERATION Auto AUTO When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/7.1 channels. Off OFF Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 84 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 32). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU Use this menu to manually adjust basic system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the crossover frequency. 87 B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 90 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 90 D)TEST TONE Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SPEAKER LEVEL and SP DISTANCE setting. 91 Sound menu 2 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page A)EQUALIZER Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 91 B)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 92 C)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 92 D)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings. 93 E)HDMI SET Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals. 93 84 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 85 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Input menu 3 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 94 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 95 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 96 D)DECODER MODE Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 96 E)MULTI CH SET Adjusts the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer, and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 96 Option menu 4 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 97 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 98 C)AUDIO SELECT Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 99 D)DECODER MODE Selects whether to initialize the settings or to recall the previous settings for the input mode selected in INPUT MENU. 99 E)PARAM.INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 99 F)ZONE SET Adjusts the Zone 2 and Zone 3 parameters. 99 G)XM RADIO SET Displays the current reception level of XM Passport System. 100 H)DOCK SET Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode. 100 Note The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models. ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 42). 85 En ADVANCED OPERATION A)DISPLAY SET 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 86 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Using SET MENU 2 Press k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. PRESET/CH SET MENU AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE 2-6 ENTER A-E/CAT. MUTE SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE AUDIO ENTER 1,7 A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT 9 0 3 MOVIE (U.S.A. model) Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH y ENTER ;MANUAL SETUP p .1BASICMENU 2SOUNDMENU 3INPUTMENU 4OPTIONMENU []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter A-E/CAT. p • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • If you press PARAMETER during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled. • Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each parameter setting. • Press RETURN or l to return to the previous menu level. y You can also press h to enter the selected menu item. Note You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night listening mode (see page 53). 1 []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter PURE DIRECT p TV INPUT PRESET/CH LEVEL 1 p TV MUTE TV ;AUTO SETUP . ;MANUAL SETUP . ;SIGNAL INFO Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 4 Press k / n repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH AMP MENU A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. SRCH MODE TV SET MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNALINFO 2 SOUND MENU 1/2 2 SOUND MENU 2/2 . E)HDMI SET p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p . A)EQUALIZER B)LFE LEVEL C)DYNAMIC RANGE D)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 86 En ENTER ENTER SET MENU SOURCE 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 87 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) 5 Press k / n repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “LFE LEVEL” is selected. 1 BASIC MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings. 2 BASIC MENU PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. p p . A)SPEAKERSET B)SPLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)TESTTONE []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter A-E/CAT. ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. B)LFE LEVEL y .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p • If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. • When the diameter of the woofer section of the speaker unit is larger than 16 cm (6.5 in), set the correspondent speaker setting parameter to “LARGE” (or “LRG”). 6 p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ Press k / n to select the desired parameter and then l / h to change the parameter settings. • Press h to increase the value. • Press l to decrease the value. PRESET/CH LFE/BASS OUT PRESET/CH ENTER [ SWFRFRONTBOTH A-E/CAT. Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE • Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. • Select “FRONT” (front) if you did not connect a subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 87). • Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 87). 87 En ADVANCED OPERATION ENTER A-E/CAT. 7 LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRONT, BOTH 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 88 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE FRONT SP SMALLLARGE [ • Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87). • Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the front left and right channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. Notes • When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 87), the LFE signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. • When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 87), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit change the value to “LARGE” automatically. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG CENTER SP NONESMLLRG [ • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/ BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the center channel signals are directed to the center speaker. 88 En Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. L/R SP NONESMLLRG [ • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 49) and “SUR. B L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. • Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 89 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Surround back speakers SB L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2 SB L/R SP SMLx1 [ SMLx2 Presence speakers PRESENCE SP Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers connected to this unit. Choices: NONE, YES CROSS OVER FREQ;;;80Hz Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE NORMALREVERSE [ • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Presence/Surround back channel priority PRIORITY Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the surround back speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRNS, SB PRESENCE SP PRIORITY NONEYES [ PRNS • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect presence speakers. • Select “YES” (yes) if you connected presence speakers and want to use them. SB [ • Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from the surround speakers. • Select “SB” to use the surround back speakers when surround back channel signals are detected in a CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals are output from the front speakers. 89 En ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround back speakers. The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “SMLx1” (small x 1) if you have a small surround back speaker that does not reproduce lowfrequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” and the rest of the signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “SMLx2” (small x 2) if you have two small surround back speakers that do not reproduce lowfrequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRGx1” (large x 1) if you have a large surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back left and right channel signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “LRGx2” (large x 2) if you have two large surround back speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back left and right channel signals are directed to the surround back left and right speakers. Bass cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 87 and 89). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 90 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 87). Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: FR. L/FR. R/SWFR/PR. L/PR. R: 0 dB CENT./SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: –1.0 dB B)SP LEVEL -__________+ .FR.L;;;;;;;;;; FR.R;;;;;;;;;; CENT.;;;;;;;;;; ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. C)SP DISTANCE p p []/[]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust • Select “FR. L” to adjust the balance of the front left speaker. • Select “FR. R” to adjust the balance of the front right speaker. • Select “CENT.” to adjust the balance of the center speaker. • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the balance of the surround left speaker. • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the balance of the surround right speaker. • Select “SB L” to adjust the balance of the surround back left speaker. • Select “SB R” to adjust the balance of the surround back right speaker. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer. • Select “PR. L” to adjust the balance of the presence left speaker. • Select “PR. R” to adjust the balance of the presence right speaker. Notes • “CENT.”, “SUR. L”, “SUR. R”, “SB L”, “SB R”, “SWFR”, “PR. L” and “PR. R” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 88), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88), “SB.L/R SP” (see page 89), “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87) and “PRESENCE SP” (see page 89) are set to “NONE” respectively. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SB.L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 89). 90 En p p . UNIT;;;;;;;;feet FRONTL;;;10.0ft FRONTR;;;10.0ft CENTER;;;;8.5ft []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/ PRNS R: 3.00m (10.0ft) CENTER: 2.60m (8.5ft) SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: 2.40m (8.0ft) • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front left speaker. • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front right speaker. • Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center speaker. • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround left speaker. • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround right speaker. • Select “SB L” to adjust the distance of the surround back left speaker. • Select “SB R” to adjust the distance of the surround back right speaker. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer. • Select “PRNS L” to adjust the distance of the presence left speaker. • Select “PRNS R” to adjust the distance of the presence right speaker. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 91 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) 2 SOUND MENU Notes • “CENTER”, “SUR. L”, “SUR. R”, “SB L”, “SB R”, “SWFR”, “PRNS L” and “PRNS R” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 88), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 88), “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 89), “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87) and “PRESENCE SP” (see page 89) are set to “NONE” respectively. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/ R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 89). ■ Test tone D)TEST TONE 2 SOUND MENU 1/2 2 SOUND MENU 2/2 . E)HDMI SET p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p . A)EQUALIZER B)LFE LEVEL C)DYNAMIC RANGE D)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL and SP DISTANCE settings. Choices: ON, OFF Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 32). D)TEST TONE ■ Equalizer A)EQUALIZER TEST TONE;;;;OFF Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the graphic equalizer. []/[]:Select ) ) Equalizer select SELECT Use this feature to select the type of equalizer. Choices: AUTO PEQ, GEQ, EQ OFF y If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. A)EQUALIZER SELECT;;;;;;;GEQ ) ) []/[]:Adjust [ENTER]:Enter Notes • Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32). • Select “GEQ” to adjust the built-in 7-frequency band graphic equalizer so that the tonal quality of the speaker matches. Press ENTER to display the graphic equalizer screen. • Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature. Note You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO SETUP” in advance (see page 32). In this case, “AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected as the default setting. 91 En ADVANCED OPERATION • This function is automatically turned off if you exit “BASIC MENU”. • If you select “ON” and enter the “SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL” or “SP DISTANCE” menu, the test tone is output from the selected speakers. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 92 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Graphic equalizer GEQ Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R and surround back L/R, surround back, presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer with that of the front L/R speakers. You can adjust 7 frequency bands (63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz). Choices: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB A)EQUALIZER .CHANNEL;;FRONTL -______+ 63Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB 160Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB 400Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB ■ Low-frequency effect level B)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB B)LFE LEVEL p .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ p Press k / n to select a frequency band and l / h to adjust the selected frequency band. Note The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is selected in “SELECT”. Test tone TEST TONE A)EQUALIZER CHANNEL;;FRONTL -______+ 16kHz ;;;;;; 0.0dB p p . TESTTONE;;;;OFF []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while listening to a test tone. To select “TEST TONE”, press n repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the selected speakers. p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ y Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 87), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. ■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. C)DYNAMIC RANGE .SP:MINSTDMAX [ HP:MINSTDMAX [ p p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Select p [ Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. 92 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 93 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Audio settings D)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. ■ HDMI set E)HDMI SET Use this feature to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals. E)HDMI SET D)AUDIO SET SUPPORT AUDIO: RX-V1700 []/[]:Adjust p [ p p . MUTE TYPE;;;FULL A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms TONE BYPASS;AUTO LE>E []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 41). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 240 ms Control step: 1 ms Note The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. 93 En ADVANCED OPERATION Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use this feature to select whether the audio output bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 50). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” if you want the signals to bypass the tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select “OFF” if you do not want the signals to bypass the tone control circuitry. Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Choices: RX-V1700, OTHER • Select “RX-V1700” to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 94 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) 3 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. 3 INPUT MENU 1/2 3 INPUT MENU 2/2 . E)MULTI CH SET p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p p . A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUT RENAME C)VOLUME TRIM D)DECODER MODE []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 1, 2 and 3 COAXIAL IN Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, MULTI CH (2) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, MULTI CH (3) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, MULTI CH ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). y The input source name in parentheses indicates the default assigned input source. For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C CMPNT-V IN Choices: [A] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX [B] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX [C] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX COAXIALIN .(1);;;;; CD ( CD ) (2);;;;; DVD ( DVD ) (3);;;;;DVR/VCR2 (DVR/VCR2) For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 4, 5, 6 and 7 OPTICAL IN Choices: (4) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MULTI CH (5) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MULTI CH (6) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MULTI CH (7) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MULTI CH OPTICALIN1/2 CMPNT-VINPUT .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV (DTV) [C];;;;;CBL/SAT (CBL/SAT) 94 En OPTICALIN2/2 .(4);;;;;CD (CD) (5);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (6);;;;;DTV (DTV) .(7);;;;;CBL/SAT (CBL/SAT) 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 95 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) For OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks 8 and 9 OPTICAL OUT Choices: (8) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX (9) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX 1 Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the input source you want to change the name of. XM PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 OPTICALOUT .(8);;;;;MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE ) (9);;;;;;;CD-R (CD-R) 2 Press l / h on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. PRESET/CH Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. ENTER A-E/CAT. 3 Press k / n to select the character you want to use and then press l / h to move to the next space. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER HDMI IN ADVANCED OPERATION For HDMI IN jacks 1and 2 HDMI IN Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX [IN2] DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. .[IN1];;; DVD ( DVD ) [IN2];;;CBL/SAT (CBL/SAT) Notes • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space. ■ Input rename B) INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. C)INPUTRENAME 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press SET MENU on the remote control to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. DVD-> DVD ________ p p [p]/[[]:Position []/[]:Chara. SET MENU y MENU SRCH MODE • This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. • You can also change the name of the input source that appears in the display window on the remote control. Refer to “Changing source names in the display window” on page 106”. 95 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 96 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: XM, TUNER, PHONO, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, DOCK, MULTI CH Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB ■ Multi channel input Setup E)MULTI CH SET Use to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you input 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. E)MULTI CH SET . BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST INPUTCH;;;;;6CH C)VOLUME TRIM This parameter also affects the signals output at ZONE OUT jacks. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE Use to switch the input mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.). Choices: AUTO, DTS D)DECODER MODE . p p CD ;;;;AUTO DVD ;;;;AUTO DTV ;;;;AUTO CBL/SAT ;;;;AUTO []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ p p p y p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ XM;;;0.0dB TUNER;;;0.0dB PHONO;;;0.0dB CD;;;0.0dB []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ BGV BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, LAST, OFF • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. • Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video source in the background. Input channels INPUT CH Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6CH, 8CH • Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals. • Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals. Note • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the input mode. If “ZONE2 AMP” is set to “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” or “BOTH” (see page 100), no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8CH”. In this case, select “6CH” and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels. Front input FRONT E)MULTI CH SET BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST INPUTCH;;;;;8CH .FRONT;;;;;;;;DVD p p []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ If you selected 8ch in “INPUT CH”, you can select the analog jacks at which the front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX Note “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”. 96 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 97 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) 4 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. 4 OPTION MENU 1/2 4 OPTION MENU 2/2 p p . E)PARAM. INI F)ZONE SET G)XM RADIO SET H)DOCKSET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p . A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORY GUARD C)AUDIO SELECT D)DECODER MODE []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Gray back GRAY BACK Use this feature to display a gray background in your video monitor when there is no video signal being input. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in your video monitor when there is no video signal being input. • Select “OFF” not to display a gray background in your video monitor. Notes ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET Note Use the “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the parameters in “DISPLAY SET” (except “DIMMER”, “SHORT MESSAGE”, “ON SCREEN” and “FL SCROLL”) to the factory presets (see page 119). A)DISPLAYSET p p .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;0 OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;;AUTO VCONV.;;;;;;;;ON []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press l to raise the position of the OSD. • Press h to lower the position of the OSD. Video conversion V CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and component video signals interchangeably and upconvert composite and S-video and component video signals to HDMI video signals. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. Notes • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. • The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Set “V CONV.” to “ON” to display the sound field parameter display and short message display. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “V CONV.” to “OFF”. • When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals even if you set “V CONV.” to “ON”. 97 En ADVANCED OPERATION Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press h to make the front panel display brighter. • Depending on the video signals being input or the system setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to “OFF”. • Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 98 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Component interlace/progressive up-conversion CMPNT I/P Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to activate the analog interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. • Select “OFF” to deactivate the analog interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. Notes • This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the OSD if “V CONV.” is set to “OFF”. • If your video monitor does not support analog video signals with 480p/576p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be displayed on your video monitor when “CMPNT I/P” is set to “ON”. Use “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the “CMPNT I/P” parameter to the factory preset setting (see page 119). HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion HDMI I/P Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p are output at the HDMI OUT jack. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to activate the HDMI interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. • Select “OFF” to deactivate the HDMI interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. Note The short message display does not appear in the following cases: – when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input – When HDMI video signals are input On-screen display time ON SCREEN Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the XM Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ALWAYS, 10SEC, 30SEC • Select “ALWAYS” to display the OSD unceasingly during an operation. • Select “10SEC” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30SEC” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as song title or channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “XM” or “DOCK” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON B)MEMORYGUARD Notes • This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the OSD if “V CONV.” is set to “OFF”. • When analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the picture quality may worsen. Short message display SHORT MESSAGE Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message display function. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to activate the short message display function. The contents of the front panel display appear at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. • Select “OFF” to deactivate the short message display function. 98 En OFFON [ []/[]:Adjust p [ • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – DSP sound field program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 99 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default input mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST C)AUDIO SELECT [AUTO LAST [p]/[[]:Adjust • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected input source. ■ Parameter initialization E)PARAM.INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial factory settings. Press the corresponding sound field program selector buttons on the remote control to select the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field program names that have been changed from their initial factory settings. Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO, SURROUND DECODE E)PARAM.INI CLASSICAL *LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAINMENT *MOVIE STEREO SURROUNDDECODE Press DSP key Note Selecting “LAST” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD SUR. button on the remote control. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST [AUTO LAST • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 98). ■ Zone set F)ZONE SET [p]/[[]:Adjust F)ZONE SET p Note Selecting “LAST” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD SUR. button on the remote control. p • Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used the connected input source. . ZONE2 VOL;;;;VAR ZONE3 VOL;;;;VAR ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT ZONE3 AMP;;;;EXT []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust p [ Zone 2 volume ZONE2 VOL Zone 3 volume ZONE3 VOL Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: VAR, FIX • Select “VAR” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote control. • Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. 99 En ADVANCED OPERATION D)DECODER MODE Notes 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 100 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP Zone 3 amplifier ZONE3 AMP Use to select how the ZONE 2 and/or ZONE 3 speakers are amplified. Choices: EXT, [SP1], [SP2], BOTH • Select “EXT” if you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers through an external amplifier connected to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “[SP1]” to use the internal surround back amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “[SP2]” to use the internal surround amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP2 speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “BOTH” to use the internal surround and surround back amplifiers of this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to both the SP1 and the SP2 speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. Notes • When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu, “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” and “BOTH” cannot be selected. • When “BOTH” is selected for “ZONE2 AMP”, only “EXT” can be selected for “ZONE3 AMP”. • When “BOTH” is selected for “ZONE3 AMP”, only “EXT” can be selected for “ZONE2 AMP”. • When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to “[SP1]” or “[SP2]” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output from the surround back speakers. • When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to “BOTH” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output from both the surround speakers and the surround back speakers in the main zone. • When both “ZONE2 AMP” and “ZONE3 AMP” are set to “[SP1]” or “[SP2]” and Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on, no sound is output from both the surround speakers and the surround back speakers in the main zone. • When you use internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3, some surround field programs may not work in the same way as when you do not use the internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3. 100 En ■ XM Radio setting G)XM RADIO SET (U.S.A. and Canada models only) G)XM RADIO SET .XM ANTENNA;;NONE XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA Use this feature to check the current reception level of the XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit (see page 61). For the best reception, orient the XM Passport System so that a value of 60% or more is displayed here. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% Notes • “NONE” is displayed if the XM Passport System is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 61). • The “XM ANTENNA” parameter cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception level. ■ Dock set H)DOCK SET H)DOCK SET .STANDBYCHRG;AUTO []/[]:Select ) ) [ENTER]:Return Charge on standby STANDBY CHRG Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 73). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby mode. • Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod only when this unit is turned on. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 101 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 103). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit (see page 6). Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV or PHONO (see page 103). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV. POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD *1 *1 POWER POWER TV AV PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV POWER STANDBY XM VCR 1 AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD SELECT SELECT AMP AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – LEVEL – – TV INPUT MUTE PRESET/CH MENU SRCH MODE *1 TV SET MENU TITLE BAND PURE DIRECT *1 LEVEL TV – TV INPUT MUTE PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY PARAMETER *1 STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER NIGHT ENHANCER 9 0 + 10 ENT 9 0 + 10 ENT *2 *2 DISC SKIP DISC SKIP ON MOVIE REC REC OFF ADVANCED OPERATION A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. MACRO LEARN CLEAR OFF RENAME (U.S.A. model) Notes *1 – – TV MUTE AUDIO ENTER *2 SOURCE SOURCE TV MUTE *2 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode selector is set to AMP. ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 102. 101 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 102 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling other components Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons or . You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 103). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button or . Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. 1 POWER POWER TV AV XM PHONO STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP TUNER CD MULTI CH IN 3 4 5 LEVEL DTV VCR 1 MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD 6 SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 8 9 PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT 5 6 0 9 0 EFFECT XM MEMORY CLASSICAL V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT PRESET/CH TITLE BAND MOVIE 4 EXTD SUR. 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT A SELECT 2 AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 7 REC DISC SKIP SOURCE y The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 14 different components. DVD player/ DVD recorder 1 2 3 4 AV POWER Power *1 ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) VCR Cable TV/ Satellite tuner TV LD player CD player MD recorder/ Tape deck CD recorder Tuner Power *1 Power *1 VCR power Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel up*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 *2 CH + TV channel up*3 Channel up CH – TV channel down*3 Channel down Channel down Channel down TITLE Title Title ENTER PRESET/CH k OFF TV Channel up Channel up iPod Title Title Band Menu enter Menu select Menu select Menu up Menu up Menu up Preset up (1 to 8) Up Down Subsequent menu Menu down Menu down Menu down Preset down (1 to 8) A-E/CAT. l Menu left Menu left Menu left Preset down (A to E) Previous menu A-E/CAT. h Menu right Menu right Menu right Preset up (A to E) Subsequent menu PRESET/CH n 5 6 7 8 9 0 A Direction A/B RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *2 VCR search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward*4 hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *2 VCR search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward*4 b Skip backward Chapter/Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Direction back Skip backward a Skip forward Chapter/Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward Skip forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec Rec (recorder) VCR rec *2 VCR rec *2 Disc skip Rec Rec s Stop Stop VCR stop *2 VCR stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop e Pause Pause VCR pause *2 VCR pause *2 Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause (Play/Pause)*5 p Play Play VCR play *2 VCR play *2 Play Play Play Play (Play/Pause)*5 MENU Menu Menu Menu AUDIO Audio DISPLAY Display Display Display Enter/recall Enter ENT Stop Play Previous menu Audio Enter Display Display Display Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your VCR only when you set the appropriate remote control code for VCR 1 (see page 103). *3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 102. *4 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *5 Simple remote mode (see page 73) *2 102 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 103 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Selecting a component to be controlled You can select a component to be controlled independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons. Press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the desired component. The name of the component to be controlled appears in the display window on the remote control. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. SELECT Remote control code default settings Input area ■ Controlling optional components (Option mode) XM “OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the option mode, press SELECT n repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display window on the remote control. Note You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See page 105 to program buttons operated within this component control area. Manufacturer Default code TUNER YAMAHA 2604 TUNER YAMAHA 2607 PHONO TV – – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 2602 CD CD YAMAHA 2300 MULTI CH INPUT DVD YAMAHA 2100 V-AUX/ DOCK TUNER YAMAHA 2606 CBL/SAT CABLE – – MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA 2500 CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 2400 DTV TV – – VCR 1 VCR – – DVR/VCR2 DVR YAMAHA 2807 DVD DVD YAMAHA 2100 Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. 1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press an input selector button or to select the input area you want to set up. XM AMP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD SOURCE V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT TV DTV VCR 1 103 En ADVANCED OPERATION SELECT Library (component category) 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 104 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window on the remote control. 4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 9 0 MOVIE LEARN y • You can set a remote control code of a different type of component to an input area. Press l / h repeatedly to change the library (component category). Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner), L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR • If you want to setup for another input area, press the input selector button or , or press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the input area. 5 y If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button or , or SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 2 through 5. Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. 3 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window. Note 0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set. Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. 6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN 7 Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether you can control your component using the remote control. POWER or AV y If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls”) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 104 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 105 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Programming codes from other remote controls 2 TV AV POWER XM TUNER POWER PHONO SLEEP POWER CD-R MULTI CH IN STANDBY CD AUDIO SEL MD/TAPE AUDIO SEL Other remote control PURE DIRECT MENU 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) AUDIO ENTER XM (U.S.A. model) SRCH MODE BAND POWER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT STANDBY DVD AV DVR/VCR 2 POWER TV VCR 1 SET MENU TITLE POWER SELECT LEVEL PRESET/CH DTV You can program remote control codes from other remote controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program the function of other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas in the following illustration. The buttons can be programmed independently for each input area. Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. SLEEP A-E/CAT. PARAMETER PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT XM MEMORY V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 0 9 MOVIE 7 8 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT 3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the name of the selected input area (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window on the remote control. SELECT REC AMP + + + DISC SKIP SOURCE TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME TV (U.S.A. model) LEARN Note 1 Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 3. Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press an input selector button or to select an input area. XM AMP 4 PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window on the remote control. SOURCE V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT TV DTV VCR 1 TV AV POWER TUNER POWER XM PHONO SLEEP POWER MULTI CH IN STANDBY CD AUDIO SEL DVD CD-R SELECT TV AMP SOURCE MD/TAPE + DVR/VCR 2 – VOLUME VCR 1 + DTV – CH V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT + PURE DIRECT AUDIO EFFECT STRAIGHT – MUTE SET MENU PARAMETER TV VOL TV INPUT MENU ENTER PRESET/CH SRCH MODE LEVEL TITLE TV MUTE BAND A-E/CAT. DISPLAY 4 RETURN XM MEMORY 8 MOVIE EXTD SUR. 3 ENTERTAIN SELECT 2 LIVE/CLUB SUR. DECODE ENT ENHANCER 7 + 10 NIGHT RENAME 1 STEREO 6 CLEAR CLASSICAL 0 LEARN 9 MACRO 5 ON REC DISC SKIP OFF (U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model) Note Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to SOURCE. When you set the operation mode selector to AMP and program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this unit. 105 En ADVANCED OPERATION The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 106 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control. “NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. TV POWER XM PHONO DTV You can change the name of the input source that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is useful when you have set an input area to control a different component. AV 1 POWER TUNER VCR 1 V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT SLEEP MULTI CH IN POWER CD DVD CD-R STANDBY MD/TAPE AUDIO SEL DVR/VCR 2 SELECT (U.S.A. model) Changing source names in the display window Other remote control Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press an input selector button or to select the input area you want to rename. The name of the selected input area appears in the display window. AMP XM SOURCE TV y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4 and 5. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 PHONO or TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD AMP DTV VCR 1 SOURCE TV (U.S.A. model) Press LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – when the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. 106 En 2 Press RENAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RENAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from 2. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 107 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Macro programming features The macro programming feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The macro programming feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 109). ■ MACRO operations 4 Press h to move the cursor to the next position. Macro buttons PRESET/CH POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY (U.S.A. model) POWER REC XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD DISC SKIP PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT ENTER DTV VCR 1 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME A-E/CAT. MACRO ON/OFF y Press l to move the cursor to the previous position. 5 1 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON. OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR ADVANCED OPERATION Press ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. MACRO 2 Press the desired macro button. 3 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF when you finish to using the macro programming operation. y If you continuously want to rename another input area, press the input selector button or , or press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 5. 6 OFF Press RENAME again to exit the renaming mode. ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME Notes Note “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. y • While the remote control is running a macro program, it does not accept any other operation until it has completed running the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. Refer to “INPUT RENAME” on page 95. 107 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 108 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Default macro functions Pressing macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY POWER POWER — — (*1) (*2) POWER TV XM POWER XM — POWER — PHONO PHONO TUNER TUNER CD CD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT — (*3) CBL/SAT POWER MD/TAPE (*1) MD/TAPE CD-R CD-R DTV DTV VCR 1 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 — — (CD area) (*4) — — — (MD/TAPE area) (*4) (CD-R area) (*4) — (VCR 1 area) (*4) DVR/VCR 2 (DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4) DVD DVD (DVD area) (*4) *1 You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component. *2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 103), you can turn on the power of your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO. *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. *4 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that component (see page 105) or set a remote control code (see page 103). 108 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 109 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Programming macro operations You can program your own macro and use the macro programming feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a button other than a macro button. 3 Notes • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. 1 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. The following example is for programming the following procedure: Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD. Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER. Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP. Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window on the remote control. POWER POWER TV AV 2 XM AMP PHONO STANDBY TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT MCR 2: AV POWER POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD MCR 3: SLEEP 3 SOURCE DTV VCR 1 TV 1 or MCR 1: DVD (U.S.A. model) MACRO AMP Indicates the number of macro steps entered TV Note Flashes alternately so you can set the next step If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window on the remote control. STANDBY POWER XM PHONO Note To change the selected input area, press SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected input area. 4 Press MACRO again using a ballpoint pen or similar object when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Note TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV ADVANCED OPERATION SOURCE VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button simultaneously. (U.S.A. model) 109 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 110 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing configurations You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names and setup remote control ID. ■ Clearing function sets 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window. y Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). SOURCE TV CLEAR or Notes • “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. • “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. AMP SOURCE TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. Press k / n to select the clear mode. L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area) Clears all learned functions in the respective input area. The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector button to select the input area. L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the amplifier functions of this unit. L;ALL Clears all learned functions. M;ALL Clears all programmed macros. RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. 110 En Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote control. CLEAR AMP 2 3 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 111 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 3 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press an input selector button or to select the input area containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote control, release the ballpoint pen or similar object used to press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. AMP XM SOURCE TV PHONO or TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV AMP VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) SOURCE 2 y (U.S.A. model) TV LEARN 4 Press LEARN again to exit. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button simultaneously. Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step2. 111 En ADVANCED OPERATION Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • If you continuously want to clear another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the input area, then repeat step 4. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 112 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a macro function You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 2 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window on the remote control. Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote control if clearing was successful. V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD AMP SOURCE TV OFF or ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME MACRO (U.S.A. model) AMP y SOURCE • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 2. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 3 Press MACRO again to exit the macro programming mode. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press more than one button simultaneously. 112 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 113 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. y • You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit. • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. REMOTE REMOTE IN Infrared signal receiver OUT REMOTE IN OUT OUT YAMAHA component YAMAHA component This unit REMOTE IN To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT terminals and select “EXT” in “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100). ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT SP OUT Amplifier Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player (or other component) VIDEO IN AUDIO IN This unit MAIN SYSTEM Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver ZONE 3 ZONE 2 Infrared emitter Main room (Main zone) REMOTE OUT Second room (Zone 2) Third room (Zone 3) REMOTE IN REMOTE IN Notes • Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when “ZONE2 VOL” or “ZONE3 VOL” are set to “FIX” (see page 99). • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 113 En ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Using external amplifiers 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 114 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your Receiver. If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “[SP1]” or “[SP2]” for “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100). If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both SP1 and SP2) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “BOTH” for “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” (see page 100). R + SP1 – PRESENCE – + L R SP2 L + R + SURROUND BACK/ – BI-AMP – + L SINGLE – Second room (Zone 2) Third room (Zone 3) This unit Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 You can select the zone you want to control by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. 2 Press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. ZONE CONTROLS ■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3 Front panel operations 1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel to individually turn on or off Zone 2 or Zone 3. Each time you press ZONE CONTROLS, the front panel display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator flashes when the main zone is selected. ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE ON/OFF ZONE 2 ZONE 3 No indicator flashes when the main zone is selected. ZONE2 Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions. ZONE3 Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions. 114 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 115 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION y • You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROLS again. • The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on. 3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or “Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 116 to perform further operations. Remote control operations 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SELECT k repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display window on the remote control. ■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 using the remote control POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work differently depending on the selected zone that appears in the display window on the remote control. • When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected , you can turn on the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually. • When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously and pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode simultaneously. Control mode Display window Turns on the main zone only or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 2 mode “ZONE 2” or “2;name of the selected input area” Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 3 mode “ZONE 3” or “3;name of the selected input area” Turns on Zone 3 or sets it to the standby mode. “ALL” POWER: turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. STANDBY: sets the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. SELECT All mode TV Notes or 2 3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or “Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 116 to perform further operations. Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. Note The input source of Zone 2 and the source available for recording are always the same. • When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when POWER or STANDBY is pressed. • “ALL” appears in the display window on the remote control only when SELECT n is pressed. ■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source of the selected zone. If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2: name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the selected input source” is displayed in the display window on the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected respectively. 115 En ADVANCED OPERATION Name of the selected input area Main zone mode AMP SOURCE POWER and STANDBY 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 116 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3 INPUT Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “BALANCE” and then rotate PROGRAM on the front panel to adjust the balance of the front left and right speaker level of the selected zone. or TONE CONTROL XM AMP PHONO SOURCE TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD PROGRAM TV DTV VCR 1 (U.S.A. model) • Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER features in the selected zone. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on page 54. • Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite Radio features in the selected zone. For details about the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 61. ■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press CH +/– on the remote control to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency response (BASS) respectively. + Note TV VOL The selected input source is shared across all zones. – y AMP You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again. SOURCE BASS TV + CH ■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 – TREBLE Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume level of the selected zone. VOLUME + or VOLUME – y Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to the selected zone. Note When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3, VOLUME +/– can be used only when ZONE2 VOL” or “ZONE3 VOL” is set to “VAR” in “ZONE SET” (see page 99). 116 En y You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting the tonal quality” on page 50. Note Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality of the corresponding zone (see page 115). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 117 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SETUP ADVANCED SETUP This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 31). • Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. Using ADVANCED SETUP 3 (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 118 for a complete list of available parameters. NIGHT EDIT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER 1-2,5 PROGRAM 2,4 Currently selected parameter Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Currently selected parameter setting SPEAKER IMP. 8 MIN MASTER 2 4 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. Press STRAIGHT on the front panel repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. STRAIGHT EFFECT STRAIGHT EFFECT While holding down 5 MASTER Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. MASTER y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. 117 En ADVANCED OPERATION 1 3 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 118 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SETUP ■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN • Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SPEAKER IMP. Speaker Front 8ΩMIN Impedance level The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround back Front 6ΩMIN The impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. RC AMP ID Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 104). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “2001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “2002”. Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround back ■ User presets USER PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 130). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. ■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel of this unit. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” if you want to activate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor. • Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor. Note We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases. 118 En WAKE ON RS232C Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode. Choices: YES, NO Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES [Other models]: NO • Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. • Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. ■ Remote control AMP ID Center Surround ■ Wake on RS-232C access Note You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library code for the remote control (see page 104). ■ Remote control TUNER ID RC TUNER ID Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 121). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “2602”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “2603”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library code for the remote control (see page 121). ■ Remote control XM ID RC XM ID (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 121). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library code is set to “2604”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library code is set to “2605”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library code for the remote control (see page 121). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 119 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SETUP ■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. ■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-AMP function. • Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP function. Setting remote control ID When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. ■ Setting remote control AMP ID 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SOURCE or TV Note When BI-AMP is set to ON, the SURROUND BACK terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-AMP connection (see page 17). AMP 2 ■ Video reset VIDEO RESET Use to initialize the parameter settings for “DISPLAY SET” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 97). Choices: YES, CANCEL SOURCE TV Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press l / h repeatedly until “L;AMP” appears in the display window on the remote control. PRESET/CH Note LEARN ENTER The parameter setting for “DIMMER”, “SHORT MESSAGE”, “ON SCREEN” and “FL SCROLL” is not initialized (see page 97). ADVANCED OPERATION A-E/CAT. Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 3 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected input area appears in the display window on the remote control. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. 119 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 120 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SETUP 4 ■ Setting remote control tuner ID or XM ID Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the input area you want to use. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MOVIE Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press TUNER or XM on the remote control to select the tuner or XM to change the remote control ID. AMP TUNER SOURCE 9 0 TV or or Remote control AMP codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP code for the input area you want to use. AMP XM SOURCE TV AMP library code (remote control setting) Function Remote control AMP ID 2001 (initial setting) To operate this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2002 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2 2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press l / h repeatedly until “L;TUN” and “TUNER”, or “L;TUN” and “XM” alternately appear in the display window on the remote control. Note PRESET/CH You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID (see page 118). LEARN ENTER A-E/CAT. 5 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1. Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. PRESET/CH ENTER 3 A-E/CAT. 6 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected input area appears in the display window on the remote control. Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. PRESET/CH LEARN ENTER A-E/CAT. 120 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 121 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM ADVANCED SETUP 4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the input area you want to use. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 9 0 5 MOVIE Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control tuner codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control tuner code for the input area you want to use. Tuner library code (remote control setting) Function Remote control tuner ID 2602 (initial setting) To operate this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2603 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2 6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN Remote control XM codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control XM code for the input area you want to use. control setting) Function ADVANCED OPERATION XM library code (remote Remote control XM ID 2604 (initial setting) To operate this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2605 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2 Note You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID or XM ID (see page 118). 121 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 122 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound 122 En Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 30 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 14 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 21-27 The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. 36 Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 40 Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or “COAX/OPT”. 40 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 14 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 41 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 19 “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and “HDMI” audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V1700” in “MANUAL SETUP”. 93 38, 41 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 123 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No picture Cause Remedy See page Set “V CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source components in the same way as you connect your video monitor to this unit. 97 “SHORT MESSAGE” is set to “OFF”. Set “SHORT MESSAGE” to “ON”. 98 “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”. Set “GRAY BACK” to “AUTO”. 97 “V CONV.” is set to “OFF”. Set “V CONV.” to “ON”. 97 The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Non-standard video signals are input. Short message displays do not appears in the video monitor The signals input at the HDMI IN1 or HDMI IN2 jack are being output at the HDMI OUT jack. Video signals in the progressive format or HDTV video signals are being input. The sound suddenly goes off. 30, 118 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 41 Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14 Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. 90 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 88 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “7ch Stereo”) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 45 No sound from the presence speakers The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT to turn them on. 49 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 38 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 88 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 49 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 87 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 87 The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. 123 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 124 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. Cause Remedy See page “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE” and “SB L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SB L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 88 “SB L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SB L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 89 Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 40 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 24 The volume level is low while a record is being played. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. Connect your turntable to this unit through an MChead amplifier. 24 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 24 The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 98 124 En Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 22, 24 Some components cannot record Dolby Digital or DTS sources. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 125 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy See page This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 14 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 28 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 56 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 56 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 56 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises can result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — 57, 58 125 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AM Cause 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 126 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK ANTENNA The XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock are not connected to the XM jack of this unit or do not work properly. Check XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock connections and orient for the best reception level. 61 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System for the best reception level. 61 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio or text data to be decoded. Wait until the decoding process has finished. — OFF AIR The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is not currently broadcasting any signals. Check the channel number again or select another XM Satellite Radio channel. — <XM> - - - The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name or song title is available. Select another channel category by pressing CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. 67 / - - - <CAT> - - - 126 En No channels are available for the selected category. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 127 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. Wrong distance or angle. See page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 9 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 9 The operation mode selector is set incorrectly. Set the operation mode selector correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the TV position. — Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 103 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 103 The remote control code was not correctly set. The remote control does not learn new functions. Remedy Cause — The library code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control library code. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 110 Remedy See page 104, 118 105 9 105 — Error message Cause DEVICE OVER The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. — HDCP ERROR HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards. — 127 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ HDMI 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 128 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod (see page 27). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 27 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Unknown type The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 27 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — ■ AUTO SETUP Before AUTO SETUP Error message Connect MIC! Unplug HP! 128 En Cause Optimizer microphone is not connected. Headphones are connected. Remedy See page Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 32 Unplug the headphones. — 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 129 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM TROUBLESHOOTING During AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 14 E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 14 E-3:NO PRNS. SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 14 E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. 14 Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E-5:NOISY E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. Connect surround speakers when you use surround back speakers. 14 E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 32 The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check the microphone setting. 32 Check the speaker connections and placement. 14 E-8:NO SIGNAL E-9:USER CANCEL The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 32 32 After AUTO SETUP Warning message W-1:OUT OF PHASE Cause Remedy See page Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — Check the speaker connections. 14 Use speakers of similar quality. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 32 14 Notes • • • • If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again. If warning “W-1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning “W-2” or “W-3” appears, no corrections are made. If error “E-10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. 129 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 130 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM RESETTING THE SYSTEM RESETTING THE SYSTEM Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position. (U.S.A. model) 3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “PRESET”. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT DISPLAY SEARCH MODE CATEGORY ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONES VIDEO AUX ON OFF MASTER 1-2,5 1 3 2,4 USERPRESET Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. CANCEL 4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel repeatedly to select “RESET”. MASTER STRAIGHT 2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT EFFECT USERPRESET While holding down RESET MASTER y Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn off this unit. MASTER 130 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 131 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM GLOSSARY GLOSSARY ■ Bi-amplification connection ■ Dolby Digital A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff. Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ Dialogue normalization Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. 131 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS programs. ■ Dolby Digital EX 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 132 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ HDMI Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ■ DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with fullquality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. 132 En ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 133 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM GLOSSARY ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 133 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 134 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION ■ Elements of a sound field ■ SILENT CINEMA What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 134 En ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ Sound output from each speaker Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program. For details about the sound output from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to “SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual. Note Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as special sound effects, etc. y Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back speakers (see page 45). 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 135 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see page 91), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz. ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Original frequency characteristic Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Band 2 Original frequency characteristic 135 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Frequency 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 136 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 130 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................................... 160/195/255/335 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 175 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 180 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω ....................................................................................... 0.9 dB • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................................... 130 W • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 150 or more • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.4 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω PRE OUT ................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................ 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 3.5 kHz • Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 450 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 2.0 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) .......... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Format (Gray Back) [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ..................... NTSC [U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL • Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) .................................................................................... 60 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω FM SECTION • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct ........... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ....... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to OUT (REC) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .......................................... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ..................... 81 dB or more [Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R .............. 60 dB/45 dB or more • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf) • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 0.2/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) Stereo .................................................................................... 42 dB • Frequency Response Stereo ............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m 136 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page 137 Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General and Asia model] ....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] .................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less [General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ....................... 0.33 W or less [Other models] .......................................................... 0.1 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 6ch, 10% THD .................................................................. 1100 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [Asia, General and China models] ........ 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [Australia and U.K. models] ..... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) [Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm (17.1 x 6.7 x 17.3 in) • Weight .................................................................. 17.0 kg (38.8 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime ADDITIONAL INFORMATION YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 137 En 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page i Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM L Front left speaker SL Surround left speaker SBR Surround back right speaker C Center speaker SR Surround right speaker PL Presence left speaker R Front right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker PR Presence right speaker Speaker from which no sound is being output Speaker from which sound is being output *1 EX / PL x / : OFF *2 EX / PL x / : ON, PRIORITY: PRNS *3 EX / PL x / : ON, PRIORITY: SB Input source Program CLASSICAL Hall in Munich Hall in Vienna Hall in Amsterdam Church in Freiburg Chamber LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard Warehouse Loft Cellar Club The Roxy Theatre The Bottom Line ENTERTAINMENT Sports Action Game Roleplaying Game Music Video Recital/Opera MOVIE STANDARD 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL L SL SBL SBR PL (PRO LOGIC) L SL L SR SL SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C PL R PR C 2-channel audio (stereo) SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C PL R PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL APPENDIX-i SBL SBR SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR PL L SR SL L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL R SR PR C SBL SBR PL R (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) PR C PL R PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 R PR C PL R (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) PR C PL R PR C PL R PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 R SR PR C SBL SBR R SR (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM Input source Program MOVIE STANDARD (PLII Movie) (PLIIx Movie) (Neo:6 Cinema) 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR 2-channel audio (stereo) PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR L SL PL R L SR SL PRIORITY: PRNS PL 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) PL PL PL PR C SBL SBR R SR PRIORITY: SB MOVIE Spectacle Sci-Fi Adventure Drama Mono Movie PL L SL STEREO 2ch Stereo PR C SBL SBR PL L SL L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R SR PR C SBL SBR R SR Monaural playback STEREO 7ch Stereo PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL L SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R SR PR C R SR APPENDIX-ii 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM Input source Program SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR 2-channel audio (stereo) PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR L SL PL R L SR SL PRO LOGIC PL 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS SURROUND DECODE PLII Movie PLII Music PLII Game PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL Movie/Game PL L SL PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Movie/Music/Game PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Music SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Movie PLIIx Music PLIIx Game PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL Movie/Game PL L SL SBL SBR Music APPENDIX-iii PR C SBL SBR R SR PL R L SR SL Movie/Music/Game PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page iv Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM Input source Program SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Cinema Neo:6 Music 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SL PL R L SR SL Cinema PL 2-channel audio (stereo) PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 PL R L SR SL Cinema/Music PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Music SURROUND DECODE neural sur. PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS STRAIGHT PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR Monaural playback PURE DIRECT PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR Monaural playback APPENDIX-iv 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page v Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES CABLE ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 CD PLAYER AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 APPENDIX-v CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY 0059 TECHNICS 0056 THORENS 0184 THULE 0184 UNIVERSUM 0184 VICTOR 0099 WARDS 0184 YAMAHA 2300, 2301 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER 0699 JVC 0585, 0650 KLH 0744 KENWOOD 0517, 0561 KOSS 0678 LG 0768 LIMIT 0795 MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702 MARANTZ 0566 MEMOREX 0858 MICO 0750 MICROSOFT 0549 MINTEK 0744 MITSUBISHI 0548 MUSTEK 0757 NESA 0744 ONKYO 0530 ORITRON 0678 PALSONIC 0699 PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389 PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 DVD RECORDER HITACHI PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER SHARP SONY TOSHIBA VICTOR YAMAHA 2815 2800, 2801, 2802 2808 2804, 2805, 2806 2812, 2813 2809, 2810, 2811 2803 2814 2807 LD PLAYER CARVER DENON MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD NAGSMI OPTIMUS PHILIPS PIONEER SALORA SONY TELEFUNKEN YAMAHA 0091 0086 0091 0086 0086 0086 0086 0091 0086 0091 0228 0086 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page vi Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 THORENS 1216 UHER 0558 VENTURER 1417 VICTOR 0101 WARDS 0041, 0185 YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358, 2601 (TUNER ID1) 2602 (TUNER ID2) 2603 (XM ID1) 2604 (XM ID2) 2605 (iPod) 2606 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT ABSAT ALBA ALPHASTAR AMSTRAD ASTON ASTRO 1327 0150 0482 0799 0874 0169, 1156 0200 ATSAT 1327 AVALON 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH PACE 1127 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 TAPE DECK AIWA 0056 CARVER 0056 GRUNDIG 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS 0056 PIONEER 0054 POLK AUDIO 0056 RCA 0054 REVOX 0056 SANSUI 0056 SONY 0270 THORENS 0056 WARDS 0054 YAMAHA 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 ASA 0131 AWA 0036 ACURA 0036 ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680 ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490 ADVENT 0788 AIKO 0119 AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 AKURA 0291 ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 CIMLINE 0036 CINERAL 0119, 0478 CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119 CLARION 0207 CLARIVOX 0064 CLATRONIC 0274, 0397 CONDOR 0347, 0397 CONRAC 0835 APPENDIX-vi 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page vii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM CONTEC CRAIG CROSLEY CROWN 0036, 0207 0207 0081 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 GEC 0064, 0543 GATEWAY 1782, 1783 GELOSO 0036 GENEXXA 0190 GIBRALTER 0044, 0057 GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 APPENDIX-vii GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI 0036, 0064 HISAWA 0482 HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 HUA TUN 0036 HUANYU 0401 HYPSON 0064, 0291 ICE 0291, 0398 ITS 0398 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445 INDIANA 0064 INFINITY 0081 INGELEN 0190 INNO HIT 0543 INNOVA 0064 INTEQ 0044 INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 JBL 0081 JCB 0027 JVC 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064 MEGATRON 0172, 0205 MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 METZ 0474 MICROMAXX 0835 MICROSTAR 0835 MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078 MINERVA 0514 MINOKA 0439 MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page viii Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 SEMIVOX 0207 SEMP 0183 SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677 SHEN YING 0036, 0119 SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263 SIAREM 0543 SIEMENS 0064, 0222 SINUDYNE 0543 SKANTIC 0383 SKYGIANT 0207 SKYWORTH 0064 SOLAVOX 0190 SONITRON 0235 SONOKO 0036, 0064 SONOLOR 0190, 0235 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445 SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW 0198 STANDARD 0036 STARLITE 0207 STERN 0190, 0286 SUPREME 0027 SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198 SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207 SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 SYSLINE 0064 T+A 0474 TCM 0835 TMK 0205 TNCI 0044 TVS 0490 TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205 TAI YI 0036 TANDY 0120, 0190 TASHIKO 0119, 0677 TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 TEC 0274 TECHNEMA 0347 TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677 TECHWOOD 0078 TECO 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER 0347 TELETECH 0036 TENSAI 0347 TERA 0057 THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 THORN 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH 0543 TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119 UHER 0347 UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677, 0796, 0860, 2900 (projector), 2901 (projector), 2903, 2904 (projector) YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON 0062 CARVER 0108 CIMLINE 0099 CINERAL 0305 CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305 COLT 0099 COMBITECH 0379 CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI KENWOOD KODAK KOLIN KORPEL LG 0099 0068, 0094 0062, 0064 0068, 0070 0099 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 MINOLTA 0069 MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 APPENDIX-viii 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page ix Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 APPENDIX-ix TELEAVIA TELEFUNKEN TENOSAL TENSAI THOMAS THOMSON 0068 0068, 0347 0099 0027 0027 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 01EN_00_RX-V1700_U.book Page x Tuesday, June 27, 2006 9:37 AM RX-V1700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, May 8, 2006 3:54 PM U RX-V1700 RX-V1700 AV Receiver © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WH63550-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-V1700 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V1700 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha RX-V1700 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha RX-V1700 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha RX-V1700 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V1700 Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha RX-V1700 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V1700 Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha RX-V1700 Ohjekirja
- čeština: Yamaha RX-V1700 Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V1700 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V1700 Kullanım kılavuzu
- polski: Yamaha RX-V1700 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha RX-V1700 Manual de utilizare
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha RX-V2065 de handleiding
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-V657 de handleiding
-
-
Yamaha HTR-5930 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-V861 de handleiding